The URL can be used to link to this page

05/17/2023 Agreement �'p COURTt b dY: V'. ........' Clerk of the Circuit Court Comptroller— Monroe Coun , Florida c®vim° Juice 5, 2023 TO: Cary Knight, Director Project Management Breanne E is so , Contract/Budget Administrator Project Management S `1'lionipson, Contract Administrator Project Management Pamela U. Hanco(k,. ).C. SUBJECT: May 17' B0CC Meeting Attached is an electronic copy of the following item for your handling: i 111 Contract, waiving the Competitive Solicitation Process set forth in Chapter 3 of the Purchasing Policy pursuant to Subchapter 7( ), with D.L. Porter Constructors, Inc. in the amount o 86,77.00 for the renovation of Bayshore Manor for the future home of the Supervisor of Elections (and authorizing the Mayor to execute the Agreement after approval by the County Atto ey's office). Should you have any questions please feel free to contact nie at (305) 292-3550. cc: County Attorney Finance File KEY WEST MARATHON PLANTATIONKEY 00 Whitehead Street 3117 Overseas Highway 88770 Overseas Highway Key West, Florida 33040 Marathon, Florida 3300 Plantation Key, Florida 33070 Agreement Between Owner and D.L. Porter Constructors, Inc. Where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM AGREEMENT Made as of the 17t" day of May 2023 BETWEEN the Owner: Monroe County Board of County Commissioners 500 Whitehead Street Key West, Florida 33040 And the Contractor: D.L. Porter Constructors, INC 6574 Palmer Park Circle Sarasota, FL 34238 For the following Project: BAYSHORE MANOR BUILDOUT FOR SUPERVISOR OF ELECTIONS Scope of the Work The Contractor is required to provide a complete job as contemplated by the drawings, which are a part of this Agreement. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, supervision, materials, power, tools, equipment, supplies, permits and any other means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the Scope of Work, unless otherwise specifically stated. ARTICLE 1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Proposal Documents, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, together with the response to RFP and all required insurance documentation, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and Page 1 of 27 supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. In the event of a discrepancy between the documents, precedence shall be determined by the order of the documents as just listed. ARTICLE 2 The Work of this Contract The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: N/A ARTICLE 3 Date of Commencement and Substantial Completion 3.1 The date of commencement is the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than One Hundred Sixty-Five (165) calendar days after the date of commencement or issuance of a Notice to Proceed. The time or times stipulated in the contract for completion of the work of the contract or of specified phases of the contract shall be the calendar date or dates listed in the milestone schedule. Liquidated damages will be based on the Substantial Completion Date for all work, modified by all approved extensions in time as set forth by the Director of Project Management's signature of approval on the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The liquidated damages table below shall be utilized to determine the amount of liquidated damages. FIRST SECOND 31ST DAY & CONTRACT AMOUNT 15 DAYS 15 DAYS THEREAFTER Under$50,000.00 $50.00/Day $100.00/Day $250.00/Day $50,000.00-99,999.00 100.00/Day 200.00/Day 750.00/Day $100,000.00-499,999.00 200.00/Day 500.00/Day 2,000.00/Day $500,000.00 and Up 500.00/Day 1,000.00/Day 3,500.00/Day The Contractor's recovery of damages and sole remedy for any delay caused by the Owner shall be an extension of time on the Contract. Uncontrollable Circumstance. Any delay or failure of either Party to perform its obligations under this Agreement will be excused to the extent that the delay or failure was caused directly by an event beyond such Party's control, without such Party's fault or negligence and that by its nature could not have been foreseen by such Party or, if it could have been foreseen, was unavoidable: (a) acts of God; (b) flood, fire, earthquake, explosion, tropical storm, hurricane or other declared emergency in the geographic area of the Project; (c)war, invasion, hostilities (whether war is declared or not), terrorist threats or acts, riot, or other civil unrest in the geographic area of the Project; (d) government order or law in the geographic area of the Project; (e) actions, embargoes, or blockades in effect on or after the date of this Agreement; (f) action by any governmental authority prohibiting work in the geographic area of the Project; (each, a "Uncontrollable Circumstance"). Contractor's financial inability to perform, changes in cost or availability Page 2 of 27 of materials, components, or services, market conditions, or supplier actions or contract disputes will not excuse performance by Contractor under this Section. Contractor shall give written notice within seven (7) days of any event or circumstance that is reasonably likely to result in an Uncontrollable Circumstance, and the anticipated duration of such Uncontrollable Circumstance. Contractor shall use all diligent efforts to end the Uncontrollable Circumstance, ensure that the effects of any Uncontrollable Circumstance are minimized and resume full performance under this Agreement. The Supervisor of Elections will not pay additional cost as a result of an Uncontrollable Circumstance. The Contractor may only seek additional time at no cost to the Supervisor of Elections as the Owner's Representative may determine. ARTICLE 4 Contract Sum 4.1 The owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Eight Hundred, Forty-Six Thousand, Seven Hundred, Forty-Seven and 00/100 Dollars ($846,747.00), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: N/A 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: N/A ARTICLE 5 Progress Payments 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted by the Contractor to the Director of Project Management, and upon approval for payment issued by the Director of Project Management and Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for payment shall be one (1) calendar month ending on the last day of the month. 5.3 Payment will be made by the Owner, upon receipt of a proper invoice from the Contractor, in accordance with the Florida Local Government Prompt Payment Act (Section 218.735, Florida Statutes) and Monroe County Code. The Contractor is to submit to the Owner invoices with supporting documentation. The Owner is exempt from sales and use taxes. A copy of the tax exemption certificate will be provided by the Owner upon request. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Director of Project Management may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Director of Project Management, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. Page 3 of 27 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of five percent(5%). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be the net cost to the Owner, less Overhead, Profit and Documented Costs incurred prior to the change Request, as indicated in the corresponding line item in the Approved Schedule of Values for that line item as confirmed by the Director of Project Management. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage; 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Director of Project Management has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 Retainage of five percent (5%) will be withheld in accordance with Section 218.735 (8)(a), Florida Statutes. ARTICLE 6 Final Payment Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor and the work has been accepted by the Owner except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment, and (2) a final approval for payment has been issued by the Director of Project Management. Such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than twenty (20) days after the issuance of the final approval for payment. The following documents (Samples in Section 01027, Application for Payment) are required for Final Payment: (1) Application and Certificate for Payment (2) Continuation Sheet (3) Certificate of Substantial Completion (4) Contractor's Affidavit of Debts and Claims (5) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (6) Final Release of Lien (7) Contractor shall provide two (2) hard copies in tabulated divided binders and one (1) saved electronically tabbed and indexed in Adobe Acrobat file (.PDF) Page 4 of 27 format delivered on a common form (i.e. flash drive) of all the following, but not limited to: A. Project Record Documents (As Built Documents). B. Operating and maintenance data, instructions to the Owner's personnel. C. Warranties, bond and guarantees. D. Keys and keying schedule. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. F. Electronic copies of approved submittals. G. Evidence of payment and final release of liens and consent of surety to final release (includes final release from all utilities and utility companies). H. Copies of either a Certificate of Completion or Certificate of Occupancy issued by the City of Key West Building Department. ARTICLE 7 Miscellaneous Provisions 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payment shall be made according to the Florida Local Government Prompt Payment Act and Monroe County Code. 7.3 Temporary facilities and services: As described in Section 01500, Temporary Facilities, of the General Conditions. 7.4 Annual Appropriation. Monroe County's performance and obligation to pay under this contract is contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Board of County Commissioners. In the event that the County funds on which this Agreement is dependent are withdrawn, this Agreement is terminated, and the County has no further obligation under the terms of this Agreement to the Contractor beyond that already incurred by the termination date. 7.5 A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract to supply any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid, proposal, or reply on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, Florida Statutes for CATEGORY TWO Page 5 of 27 for a period of thirty-six(36) months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 7.6 The following items are included in this contract: a) Maintenance of Records. Contractor shall maintain all books, records, and documents directly pertinent to performance under this Agreement in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied. Records shall be retained for a period of seven (7) years from the termination of this Agreement or five (5) years from the submission of the final expenditure report as per 2 CFR §200.333, if applicable, whichever is greater. Each party to this Agreement or their authorized representatives shall have reasonable and timely access to such records of each other party to this Agreement for public records purposes during the term of the Agreement and for seven (7) years following the termination of this Agreement. If an auditor employed by the County or County Clerk determines that monies paid to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement were spent for purposes not authorized by this Agreement, or were wrongfully retained by the Contractor, the Contractor shall repay the monies together with interest calculated pursuant to Section 55.03, Florida Statutes, running from the date the monies were paid by the Owner. Right to Audit_ Availability of Records. The records of the parties to this Agreement relating to the Project, which shall include but not be limited to accounting records (hard copy, as well as computer readable data if it can be made available; subcontract files (including proposals of successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps, bidding instructions, bidders list, etc); original estimates; estimating work sheets; correspondence; change order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements); backcharge logs and supporting documentation; general ledger entries detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates and dividends; any other supporting evidence deemed necessary by Owner or by the Monroe County Office of the Clerk of Court and Comptroller (hereinafter referred to as "County Clerk") to substantiate charges related to this Agreement, and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may in Owner's or the County Clerk's reasonable judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any contract document (all foregoing hereinafter referred to as "Records") shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and/or reproduction by Owner's representative and/or agents of Owner or the County Clerk. Owner or County Clerk may also conduct verifications such as, but not limited to, counting employees at the job site, witnessing the distribution of payroll, verifying payroll computations, overhead computations, observing vendor and supplier payments, miscellaneous allocations, special charges, verifying information and amounts through interviews and written confirmations with employees, Subcontractors, suppliers, and contractors' representatives. All records shall be kept for ten (10) years after Final Completion of the Project. The County Clerk possesses the independent authority to conduct an audit of records, assets, and activities relating to this Project. If an auditor employed by the County or County Clerk determines that monies paid to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement were spent for purposes not authorized by this Agreement, or were wrongfully retained by the Contractor, the Contractor shall repay the monies together with interest calculated pursuant to Section 55.03, Florida Statutes, running from the date the monies were paid to Contractor. The Right to Audit provisions survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement. Page 6 of 27 b) Governing Law, Venue, Interpretation, Costs, and Fees: This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida applicable to contracts made and to be performed entirely in the State. In the event that any cause of action or administrative proceeding is instituted for the enforcement or interpretation of this Agreement, the County and Contractor agree that venue shall lie in the appropriate court or before the appropriate administrative body in Monroe County, Florida. The Parties waive their rights to trial by jury. The County and Contractor agree that, in the event of conflicting interpretations of the terms or a term of this Agreement by or between any of them, the issue shall be submitted to mediation prior to the institution of any other administrative or legal proceeding. c) Severability. If any term, covenant, condition or provision of this Agreement (or the application thereof to any circumstance or person) shall be declared invalid or unenforceable to any extent by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remaining terms, covenants, conditions and provisions of this Agreement, shall not be affected thereby; and each remaining term, covenant, condition and provision of this Agreement shall be valid and shall be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law unless the enforcement of the remaining terms, covenants, conditions and provisions of this Agreement would prevent the accomplishment of the original intent of this Agreement. The County and Contractor agree to reform the Agreement to replace any stricken provision with a valid provision that comes as close as possible to the intent of the stricken provision. d) Attorney's Fees and Costs. The County and Contractor agree that in the event any cause of action or administrative proceeding is initiated or defended by any party relative to the enforcement or interpretation of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorney's fees and court costs as an award against the non-prevailing party and shall include attorney's fees and court costs in appellate proceedings. e) Binding Effect. The terms, covenants, conditions, and provisions of this Agreement shall bind and inure to the benefit of the County and Contractor and their respective legal representatives, successors, and assigns. f) Authority. Each party represents and warrants to the other that the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement have been duly authorized by all necessary County and corporate action, as required by law. Each party agrees that it has had ample opportunity to submit this Contract to legal counsel of its choice and enters into this agreement freely, voluntarily and with advice of counsel. g) Claims for Federal or State Aid. Contractor and County agree that each shall be, and is, empowered to apply for, seek, and obtain federal and state funds to further the purpose of this Agreement. Any conditions imposed as a result of the funding that affect the Project will be provided to each party. h) Adjudication of Disputes or Disagreements. County and Contractor agree that all disputes and disagreements shall be attempted to be resolved by meet and confer sessions between representatives of each of the parties. If the issue or issues are still not resolved to the satisfaction of the parties, then any party shall have the right to seek such relief or remedy as may be provided by this Agreement or by Florida law. Page 7 of 27 This Agreement is not subject to arbitration. This provision does not negate or waive the provisions of Section 7.4, Section 7.6 or Article 8 concerning termination or cancellation. i) Cooperation. In the event any administrative or legal proceeding is instituted against either party relating to the formation, execution, performance, or breach of this Agreement, County and Contractor agree to participate, to the extent required by the other party, in all proceedings, hearings, processes, meetings, and other activities related to the substance of this Agreement or provision of the services under this Agreement. County and Contractor specifically agree that no party to this Agreement shall be required to enter into any arbitration proceedings related to this Agreement. j) Nondiscrimination/Equal Employment Opportunity. The parties agree that there will be no discrimination against any person, and it is expressly understood that upon a determination by a court of competent jurisdiction that discrimination has occurred, this Agreement automatically terminates without any further action on the part of any party, effective the date of the court order. The parties agree to comply with all Federal and Florida statutes, and all local ordinances, as applicable, relating to nondiscrimination. These include but are not limited to: 1) Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (PL 88-352), which prohibit discrimination in employment on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, and national origin; 2) Title IX of the Education Amendment of 1972, as amended (20 USC §§ 1681-1683, and 1685-1686), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex; 3) Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (20 USC § 794), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability; 4) The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended (42 USC §§ 6101-6107), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of age; 5) The Drug Abuse Office and Treatment Act of 1972 (PL 92-255), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of drug abuse; 6) The Comprehensive Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism Prevention, Treatment and Rehabilitation Act of 1970 (PL 91-616), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of alcohol abuse or alcoholism; 7) The Public Health Service Act of 1912, §§ 523 and 527 (42 USC §§ 690dd-3 and 290ee-3), as amended, relating to confidentiality of alcohol and drug abuse patent records; 8) Title VIII of the Civil Rights Act of 1968 (42 USC §§ 3601 et seq.), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination in the sale, rental or financing of housing; 9) The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 USC §§ 12101 Note), as may be amended from time to time, relating to nondiscrimination in employment on the basis of disability; 10) Monroe County Code Chapter 14, Article 11, which prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, sex, religion, national origin, ancestry, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, familial status or age; and 11) any other nondiscrimination provisions in any federal or state statutes which may apply to the parties to, or the subject matter of, this Agreement. k) Covenant of No Interest. County and Contractor covenant that neither presently has any interest, and shall not acquire any interest, which would conflict in any manner or degree with its performance under this Agreement, and that only interest of each is to perform and receive benefits as recited in this Agreement. 1) Code of Ethics. County agrees that officers and employees of the County recognize and will be required to comply with the standards of conduct for public officers and employees as delineated in Section 112.313, Florida Statutes, regarding, but not limited to, solicitation or acceptance of gifts; doing business with one's agency; Page 8 of 27 unauthorized compensation; misuse of public position, conflicting employment or contractual relationship; and disclosure or use of certain information. m) No Solicitation/Payment. The County and Contractor warrant that, in respect to itself, it has neither employed nor retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for it, to solicit or secure this Agreement and that it has not paid or agreed to pay any person, company, corporation, individual, or firm, other than a bona fide employee working solely for it, any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Agreement. For the breach or violation of the provision, the Contractor agrees that the County shall have the right to terminate this Agreement without liability and, at its discretion, to offset from monies owed, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration. n) Employment or Retention of Former County Officers or Employees. Contractor warrants that it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on its behalf any former County officer or employee subject to the prohibition of Section 2 of Monroe County Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Monroe County Ordinance No. 020-1990. For breach or violation of this provision the County may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee. o) Public Records Compliance. Contractor must comply with Florida public records laws, including but not limited to Chapter 119, Florida Statutes and Section 24 of Article I of the Constitution of Florida. The County and Contractor shall allow and permit reasonable access to, and inspection of, all documents, records, papers, letters or other "public record" materials in its possession or under its control subject to the provisions of Chapter 119, Florida Statutes and made or received by the County and Contractor in conjunction with this contract and related to contract performance. The County shall have the right to unilaterally cancel this contract upon violation of this provision by the Contractor. Failure of the Contractor to abide by the terms of this provision shall be deemed a material breach of this contract and the County may enforce the terms of this provision in the form of a court proceeding and shall, as a prevailing party, be entitled to reimbursement of all attorney's fees and costs associated with that proceeding. This provision shall survive any termination or expiration of the contract. The Contractor is encouraged to consult with its advisors about Florida Public Records Law in order to comply with this provision. Pursuant to Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes and the terms and conditions of this contract, the Contractor is required to: (1) Keep and maintain public records that would be required by the County to perform the service. (2) Upon receipt from the County's custodian of records, provide the County with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected Page 9 of 27 or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law. (3) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the County. (4) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the County all public records in possession of the Contractor or keep and maintain public records that would be required by the County to perform the service. If the Contractor transfers all public records to the County upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the Contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the County, upon request from the County's custodian of records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the County. (5) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a County contract must be made directly to the County, but if the County does not possess the requested records, the County shall immediately notify the Contractor of the request, and the Contractor must provide the records to the County or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. If the Contractor does not comply with the County's request for records, the County shall enforce the public records contract provisions in accordance with the contract, notwithstanding the County's option and right to unilaterally cancel this contract upon violation of this provision by the Contractor. A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the County or pursuant to a valid public records request within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. The Contractor shall not transfer custody, release, alter, destroy or otherwise dispose of any public records unless or otherwise provided in this provision or as otherwise provided by law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, TO THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT, CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS, BRIAN BRADLEY AT PHONE# 305-292- 3470 BRADLEY-BRIAN@MONROECOUNTY-FL.GOV, MONROE COUNTY ATTORNEYS OFFICE, 1111 12TH Street, SUITE 408, KEY WEST, FL 33040. Page 10 of 27 p) Non-Waiver of Immunity. Notwithstanding the provisions of Section 768.28, Florida Statutes, the participation of the Contractor and the County in this Agreement and the acquisition of any commercial liability insurance coverage, self-insurance coverage, or local government liability insurance pool coverage shall not be deemed a waiver of immunity to the extent of liability coverage, nor shall any contract entered into by the County be required to contain any provision for waiver. q) Privileges and Immunities. All of the privileges and immunities from liability, exemptions from laws, ordinances, and rules and pensions and relief, disability, workers' compensation, and other benefits which apply to the activity of officers, agents, or employees of any public agents or employees of the County, when performing their respective functions under this Agreement within the territorial limits of the County shall apply to the same degree and extent to the performance of such functions and duties of such officers, agents, volunteers, or employees outside the territorial limits of the County. r) Legal Obligations and Responsibilities: This Agreement is not intended to, nor shall it be construed as, relieving any participating entity from any obligation or responsibility imposed upon the entity by law except to the extent of actual and timely performance thereof by any participating entity, in which case the performance may be offered in satisfaction of the obligation or responsibility. s) Non-Delegation of Constitutional or Statutory Duties: This Agreement is not intended to, nor shall it be construed as, authorizing the delegation of the constitutional or statutory duties of the County, except to the extent permitted by the Florida constitution, state statute, and case law. t) Non-Reliance by Non-Parties. No person or entity shall be entitled to rely upon the terms, or any of them, of this Agreement to enforce or attempt to enforce any third- party claim or entitlement to or benefit of any service or program contemplated hereunder, and the County and the Contractor agree that neither the County nor the Contractor or any agent, officer, or employee of either shall have the authority to inform, counsel, or otherwise indicate that any particular individual or group of individuals, entity or entities, have entitlements or benefits under this Agreement separate and apart, inferior to, or superior to the community in general or for the purposes contemplated in this Agreement. u) Attestations. Contractor agrees to execute such documents as the County may reasonably require, to include a Public Entity Crime Statement, an Ethics Statement, and a Drug-Free Workplace Statement. v) No Personal Liability. No covenant or agreement contained herein shall be deemed to be a covenant or agreement of any member, officer, agent or employee of Monroe County in his or her individual capacity, and no member, officer, agent or employee of Monroe County shall be liable personally on this Agreement or be subject to any personal liability or accountability by reason of the execution of this Agreement. w) Execution in Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be regarded as an original, all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument and any of the parties hereto may execute this Agreement by signing any such counterpart. Page 11 of 27 x) Hold Harmless, Indemnification, and Defense. Notwithstanding any minimum insurance requirements prescribed elsewhere in this Agreement, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the COUNTY and the COUNTY's elected and appointed officers and employees harmless from and against(i) any claims, actions or causes of action, (ii) any litigation, administrative proceedings, appellate proceedings, or other proceedings relating to any type of injury (including death), loss, damage, fine, penalty or business interruption, and (iii) any costs or expenses that may be asserted against, initiated with respect to, or sustained by, any indemnified party by reason of, or in connection with, (A) any activity of Contractor or any of its employees, agents, contractors or other invitees during the term of this Agreement, (B) the negligence or recklessness, intentional wrongful misconduct, errors or other wrongful act or omission of Contractor or any of its employees, agents, sub-contractors or other invitees, or(C) Contractor's default in respect of any of the obligations that it undertakes under the terms of this Agreement, except to the extent the claims, actions, causes of action, litigation, proceedings, costs or expenses arise from the intentional or sole negligent acts or omissions of the COUNTY or any of its employees, agents, contractors or invitees (other than Contractor). The monetary limitation of liability under this contract shall be not less than $1 million per occurrence pursuant to Section 725.06, Florida Statutes. The limits of liability shall be as set forth in the insurance requirements included in this Agreement. Insofar as the claims, actions, causes of action, litigation, proceedings, costs or expenses relate to events or circumstances that occur during the term of this Agreement, this section will survive the expiration of the term of this Agreement or any earlier termination of this Agreement. In the event that the completion of the project(to include the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor's failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. Should any claims be asserted against the County by virtue of any deficiency or ambiguity in the plans and specifications provided by the Contractor, the Contractor agrees and warrants that the Contractor shall hold the County harmless and shall indemnify it from all losses occurring thereby and shall further defend any claim or action on the County's behalf. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this Agreement. This indemnification shall survive the termination of this Contract. Nothing contained in this paragraph is intended to nor shall it constitute a waiver of the County's sovereign immunity. y) Section Headings. Section headings have been inserted in this Agreement as a matter of convenience of reference only, and it is agreed that such section headings are not a part of this Agreement and will not be used in the interpretation of any provision of this Agreement. z) Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Policy and Obligation. It is the policy of the County that DBE's, as defined in C.F.R. Part 26, as amended, shall have the opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts financed in whole or in part with County funds under this agreement. The DBE requirements of applicable federal and state laws and regulations apply to this Agreement. The County and its Contractor Page 12 of 27 agree to ensure that DBE's have the opportunity to participate in the performance of the Agreement. In this regard, all recipients and contractors shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with applicable federal and state laws and regulations to ensure that DBE's have the opportunity to compete and perform contracts. The County and Contractor and subcontractors shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex in award and performance of contracts, entered pursuant to this Agreement. aa)Agreements with Subcontractors. In the event that the Contractor subcontracts any or all of the work in this project to any third party, the Contractor specifically agrees to identify the COUNTY as an additional insured on all insurance policies required by the County. In addition, the Contractor specifically agrees that all agreements or contracts of any nature with his subcontractors shall include the COUNTY as additional insured. bb) Florida Green Building Coalition Standards. Monroe County requires its buildings to conform to Florida Green Building Coalition standards. Special Conditions, if any, are detailed in Section 00100 of the Project Manual for this Project. cc) Independent Contractor. At all times and for all purposes under this Agreement, Contractor is an independent contractor and not an employee of the Board of County Commissioners of Monroe County. No statement contained in this Agreement shall be construed so as to find Contractor or any of its employees, subcontractors, servants, or agents to be employees of the Board of County Commissioners of Monroe County. dd) E-Verify System. Beginning January 1, 2021, in accordance with Section 448.095, Florida Statutes, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall register with and shall utilize the U.S. Department of Homeland Security's E-Verify system to verify the work authorization status of all new employees hired by the Contractor during the term of the Contract and shall expressly require any subcontractors performing work or providing services pursuant to the Contract to likewise utilize the U.S. Department of Homeland Security's E-Verify system to verify the work authorization status of all new employees hired by the subcontractor during the Contract term. Any subcontractor shall provide an affidavit stating that the subcontractor does not employ, contract with, or subcontract with an unauthorized alien. The Contractor shall comply with and be subject to the provisions of Section 448.095, Florida Statutes. ee) Entire Agreement. This writing embodies the entire agreement and understanding between the parties hereto, and there are no other agreements and understandings, oral or written, with reference to the subject matter hereof that are not merged herein and superseded hereby. Any amendment to this Agreement shall be in writing, approved by the Board of County Commissioners, and signed by both parties before it becomes effective. 7.7 Any written notices or correspondence given pursuant to this contract shall be sent by United States Mail, certified, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or by courier with proof of delivery. The place of giving Notice shall remain the same as set forth herein until changed in writing in the manner provided in this paragraph. Notice is deemed received by Contractor when hand delivered by national courier with proof of delivery or by U.S. Page 13 of 27 Mail upon verified receipt or upon the date of refusal or non-acceptance of delivery. Notice shall be sent to the following persons: For Contractor: Gary A. Loer, President D.L. Porter Constructors, Incorporated 6574 Palmer Park Circle Sarasota, Florida 34238 For Owner: Director of Project Management Assistant County Administrator, PW& E 1100 Simonton St., Room 2-216 1100 Simonton St. Key West, Florida 33040 Key West, Florida 33040 County Attorney 1111 12th Street, Suite 408 Key West, Florida 33040 ARTICLE 8 Insurance 8.1 The CONTRACTOR shall obtain insurance as specified and maintain the required insurance at all times that this Agreement is in effect. In the event the completion of the project (to include the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the COUNTY from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. 8.2 The coverage provided herein shall be provided by an insurer with an A.M. Best rating of A: VI or better, that is licensed to business in the State of Florida and that has an agent for service of process within the State of Florida. The coverage shall contain an endorsement providing sixty (60) days' notice to the COUNTY prior to any cancellation of said coverage. Said coverage shall be written by an insurer acceptable to the COUNTY and shall be in a form acceptable to the COUNTY. 8.3 CONTRACTOR shall obtain and maintain the following policies: A. Workers' Compensation insurance as required by the State of Florida, sufficient to respond to Chapter 440, Florida Statutes. B. Employers' Liability Insurance with limits of$ 1,000,000 per Accident, $ 1,000,000 Disease, policy limits, $1,000,000 Disease each employee. C. Comprehensive Business Automobile and Vehicle Liability Insurance covering claims for injuries to members of the public and/ or damages to property of others arising from use of motor vehicles, including onsite and offsite operations, and owned, hired or non-owned vehicles, with $500,000 per person, $1,000,000 per Occurrence, $100,000 Property Damage or$1,000,000 combined single limit. D. Commercial General Liability Insurance, including Personal Injury Liability, covering claims for injuries to members of the public or damage to property of others arising out of any covered act or omission of the CONTRACTOR or any of Page 14 of 27 its employees, agents or subcontractors, including Premises and/ or Operations, Products and Completed Operations, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage and a Blanket Contractual Liability Endorsement with $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit E. An Occurrence Form policy is preferred. If coverage is changed to or provided on a Claims Made policy, its provisions should include coverage for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract. In addition, the period for which claims may be reported must extend for a minimum of 48 months following the termination or expiration of this contract. F. COUNTY shall be named as an additional insured with respect to CONTRACTOR'S liabilities hereunder in insurance coverages identified in Paragraphs C and D. G. CONTRACTOR shall require its subcontractors to be adequately insured at least to the limits prescribed above, and to any increased limits of CONTRACTOR if so required by COUNTY during the term of this Agreement. COUNTY will not pay for increased limits of insurance for subcontractors. H. CONTRACTOR shall provide to the COUNTY certificates of insurance or a copy of all insurance policies including those naming the COUNTY as an additional insured. The COUNTY reserves the right to require a certified copy of such policies upon request. I. If the CONTRACTOR participates in a self-insurance fund, a Certificate of Insurance will be required. In addition, the CONTRACTOR may be required to submit updated financial statements from the fund upon request from the COUNTY. ARTICLE 9 Termination or Suspension 9.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 9.2 In the event that the Contractor shall be found to be negligent in any aspect of service, the County shall have the right to terminate this Agreement after five (5) calendar days'written notification to the Contractor. 9.3 Either of the parties hereto may cancel this Agreement without cause by giving the other party sixty (60) days' written notice of its intention to do so. 9.4 Termination for Cause and Remedies: In the event of breach of any contract terms, the County retains the right to terminate this Agreement. The County may also terminate this Agreement for cause with Contractor should Contractor fail to perform the covenants herein contained at the time and in the manner herein provided. In the event of such termination, prior to termination, the County shall provide Contractor with seventy-two (72) hours' written notice and provide the Contractor with an opportunity to cure the breach that has occurred. If the breach is not cured, the Agreement will be terminated for cause. Page 15 of 27 If the County terminates this Agreement with the Contractor, County shall pay Contractor the sum due the Contractor under this Agreement prior to termination, unless the cost of completion to the County exceeds the funds remaining in the contract; however, the County reserves the right to assert and seek an offset for damages caused by the breach. The maximum amount due to Contractor shall not in any event exceed the spending cap in this Agreement. In addition, the County reserves all rights available to recoup monies paid under this Agreement, including the right to sue for breach of contract and including the right to pursue a claim for violation of the County's False Claims Ordinance, located at Section 2-721 et al. of the Monroe County Code. 9.5 Termination for Convenience: The County may terminate this Agreement for convenience, at any time, upon thirty (30) days' written notice to Contractor. If the County terminates this Agreement with the Contractor, County shall pay Contractor the sum due the Contractor under this Agreement prior to termination, unless the cost of completion to the County exceeds the funds remaining in the contract. The maximum amount due to Contractor shall not exceed the spending cap in this Agreement. 9.6 For Contracts of any amount, if the County determines that the Contractor/Consultant has submitted a false certification under Section 287.135(5), Florida Statutes or has been placed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or is engaged in a boycott of Israel, the County shall have the option of (1) terminating the Agreement after it has given the Contractor/Consultant written notice and an opportunity to demonstrate the agency's determination of false certification was in error pursuant to Section 287.135(5)(a), Florida Statutes, or (2) maintaining the Agreement if the conditions of Section 287.135(4), Florida Statutes, are met. 9.7 For Contracts of $1,000,000 or more, if the County determines that the Contractor/Consultant submitted a false certification under Section 287.135(5), Florida Statutes, or if the Contractor/Consultant has been placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, the County shall have the option of (1) terminating the Agreement after it has given the Contractor/Consultant written notice and an opportunity to demonstrate the agency's determination of false certification was in error pursuant to Section 287.135(5)(a), Florida Statutes, or(2) maintaining the Agreement if the conditions of Section 287.135(4), Florida Statutes, are met. ARTICLE 10 Enumeration of Contract Documents 10.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: a) Drawings by Reynold Engineering Services, Inc. dated March 15, 2023, updated April 5, 2023-8 pages total. Page Numbers: CS-1, D-1, LS-1, A-1, EMP-1, S-1, S-2, and S-3. b) Project Specifications by Reynolds Engineering Services, Inc. dated April 7, 2023 - 187 pages total. Page 16 of 27 10.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. 10.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 10.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated: N/A 10.1.4 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: Number Date # of Pages 1 April 11, 2023 6 2 April 14, 2023 2 This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least one (1) original copy. BALANCE OF PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW Page 17 of 27 i SiIGNATURE PAGE y the Contractor must be by a person with authority to bind the entity, TOF THE PERSON EXECUTINGTHE DOCUMENT MUST BE NOTARIZED. BOARD OF COIF TY COMMISSIONERS a ok, Clerk OF MONROE NTY, FL DA y As Deputy Clerk Mayor/Chairman DC w..te ......,M y. 1, ,,,, ... (SEAL) i 3 CONTRACTOR'SWitnesses Attest: CONTRACTOR: CONSTRUCTO IN provideContractor must i signatures Signature. Signature Print Names _.. . r Print e. Coleen Castagna Title ........ President __.._._:._ ...... __._ .....w o Da ate: Y , 2023 and C-) D C" Signature. Print Name: Charles Bell Cn "m:; STATE OF m...FLORIDACOUNTY O On this-19th day of , 2023 w before me, the undersigned notary public, by means of 0 physical presence or 0 online, personally appeared (name of a ant) n to bete on whose name is subscribed above or whop u ......,,,,„............................ as Identification, and acknowledged thathe/she is the person who executed the above contract with Monroe County for BAYSHORE MANOR BUILDOUT FOR SUPERVISOR L ION for the purposes therein contained. Notary Pub KW DRYDW # Print Name Trv—cen 74, _... _... My commission expires, Februan.1 24, 2027 (Seal) Page 18 of 27 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 1. SUMMARY This section provides procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 2. FORMAT The Application for Payment including the Continuation Sheet is the required format for submitting invoices. A copy of these forms is included in this section. The Owner reserves the right to modify the format to better suit his internal accounting system. 3. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. The initial Application for Payment will not be processed until the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Schedule of Values, and the initial Submittal Schedule have been received, reviewed, and approved by Project Management. B. Submit an updated Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule and a Partial Release of Lien with each Application for Payment. C. Payment shall be made according to the Local Government Prompt Payment Act, Sec. 218.70 et seq., Florida Statutes. D. The Supervisor of Elections makes every effort to meet the payment schedule. It is requested that the contractor not make any calls to any County office inquiring about payment until the twentieth (20th) day after submission of the pay request. 4. MONTHLY PAY REQUEST PROCEDURE A. Project Management to review as-builts as to current additions, corrections, etc., prior to monthly approval to ensure as-builts are current. 5. FINAL PAY PROCEDURE A. To help expedite the final payment, it is necessary for Project Management to have a correct and complete package of documents twenty (20) days in advance of requested pay date. B. A minimum of ten (10) working days is required from receipt of correct documents, to obtain necessary signatures and submit project for Final Payment. Contractor shall submit all required forms and releases to Project Management. The following documents (samples attached) are required for Final Payment: (1) Application and Certificate for Payment (2) Continuation Sheet (3) Certificate of Substantial Completion (4) Contractor's Affidavit of Debts and Claims (5) Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (6) Final Release of Lien Page 19 of 27 Also, all warranties and guarantees required by Contract, "As-Built' drawings, including red-lined site plan, submittal documents, certification that all utility bills (i.e., electric, local water) have been paid, and a complete list of subcontractors with addresses and phone numbers must be submitted prior to final payment in both bound paper and electronic PDF form. C. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the completeness of the Final Pay Package. Incompleteness will result in delay of Final Pay. Final Pay Requests will not be processed until all the required documents are received by Monroe County Project Management. Final Pay Request must be submitted no later than thirty (30) days after final project completion and acceptance. 6. SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When the Owner's Representative requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. B. Provide one (1) copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Indicate Application number, date, line item by number and description. Page 20 of 27 AA IR Al LL p, L 41 v qm way as A0 g 'mm Q gr c, V Lq F uj A2 2 > LU rr_ ca 19 t" (If LL Eq To A7 wo I(r) N r� u� rwa � wx arr am a� au wu- a+u wu rru � ra � rm ra qua aru qua era qua o ra o Ewa O N N a 1- N am vo wu am a uTh m wa ro wv re m w m as mro a wo m as am wn av O O 2 u,. as H Z W a a O LL O a a n a CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: CONTRACT FOR: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATE: TO OWNER: TO CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) (Name and address) DATE OF ISSUANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Project Manager's best knowledge, information and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as: which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below: A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. INSPECTOR BY DATE (if used) The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within the above date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR BY DATE The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at (time), on (date). OWNER BY DATE The responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance shall be as follows: Note-Owners and Contractors legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage. Page 23 of 27 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Contractor submission of a Schedule of Values. 1. The Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work by Divisions shall be submitted to Project Management within three (3) days after Notice to Proceed. 2. No item in the Schedule of Values shall exceed $25,000.00 without prior approval from Monroe County Supervisor of Elections. 3. Upon request of Project Management, revise and/or support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. 4. The Schedule of Values forms the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 5. The Schedule of Values shall be the basis for the amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner as per 5.6.1 of the Contract. 1.2 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Type schedule on AIA G703 Form; the Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered by Project Management upon the Contractor's request. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of Project and location 2. Architect/Engineer 3. Name and Address of the Contractor 4. Contract designation 5. Date of submission B. List the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. C. Follow the Specifications as the format for listing component items. 1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the Specifications. D. Itemize separate line item cost for each of the following general cost items: 1. Mobilization. 2. Bonds, Insurance and Permits. 3. Clean-up. 4. Submittals. 5. Safety. E. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item. F. For the various portions of the Work: Page 24 of 27 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT TERMINATION A. The Contract requirements are met when construction activities have successfully produced, in this order, these three (3) terminal activities: 1. Substantial Completion. 2. Final Completion. 3. Final Payment. 1.2 NOTICE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Contractor shall submit to Project Management when work is substantially complete: 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete. 2. Request Substantial Completion Observation at a mutually agreeable date. 3. Certifications of systems and testing/balancing final reports. 4. Submit evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: a. Certificate of Occupancy (or Completion) b. Certificates of Inspection as applicable: 1) Electrical systems if required by Code B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Owner and the Contractor will make an observation to determine the status of completion. C. Should the Owner determine that the work is not substantially complete, the following will occur: 1. The Owner will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons. 2. The Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Owner. 3. The Owner will re-observe the Work. D. When the Owner concurs that the Work is substantially complete, the following will occur: 1. Project Management will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion accompanied by the Punch List of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by Project Management. Contract responsibilities are not altered by inclusion or omission of required Work from the punch list. 2. The Owner will submit the certificate to the contractor for written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the certificate. E. Contractor shall complete or correct items identified on the punch list and required by the Contract requirements within time limit established by the certificate. Page 25 of 27 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. To attain final completion, the Contractor shall complete activities pertaining to substantial completion, complete Work on punch list items and submit written request to the Owner for final inspection within thirty (30) calendar days of date of substantial completion. B. When the Work is complete, the Contractor shall submit written certification that: 1. The Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final observation. C. The Owner and the Contractor will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. D. Should the Owner consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. The Owner will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification to the Owner that the Work is complete. 3. The Owner will re-inspect the Work. E. When the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents as determined by the Owner, the Owner will request the Contractor to make close-out submittals. Warranties & Guarantees for everything will begin at Substantial Completion. 1.4 THE CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO THE OWNER Contractor shall provide two (2) hard copies in tabulated divided binders and one(1) saved electronically tabbed and indexed in Adobe Acrobat file (.PDF) format delivered on a common electronic form (i.e. flash drive) of the all the following but not limited to: A. Project Record Documents (As Built Documents). B. Operating and maintenance data, instructions to the Owner's personnel. C. Warranties, bond and guarantees. D. Keys and keying schedule. E. Spare parts and maintenance materials. F. Electronic copies of approved submittals. Page 26 of 27 G. Evidence of payment and final release of liens and consent of surety to final release (includes final release from all utilities and utility companies). 1.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Owner. B. Statement shall reflect adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Allowances. C. Deductions for uncorrected Work. d. Deductions for Liquidated Damages. e. Deductions for Re-inspection Payments. f. Other Adjustments. C. The Owner will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. The Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract. 1. Include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit for each item. 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into: a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. The total installed value. C. Attach vendor invoices. d. No progress payments will be made for any materials stored off site. 3. Submit a sub-schedule for each separate stage of work specified. G. The sum of values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. 1.3 REVIEWAND SUBMITTAL A. After review by Project Management, revise and resubmit schedule (and Schedule of Material Values) as required. B. Resubmit revised schedule in same manner. Page 27 of 27 WOO saoin�as6uuaau,BuaspiouRaH wif VaRi0�3 aNV�S171001S H12iON 42i 3J3-nOO OOZS L869176£-SO£ 3O2]NOW 30 AiNf1OO _ g Z70££ 13`Aa)i pueliawwng Remgb'HseasJan08LttE - W w L699Z'ON.b,.013 1340W32j-lvlo2j3AAOO out`saoinJag 6uuaaw6u3 spIouRab = CD Of z w z_ �a w0¢ Y co Z I 0 m¢ Of Of W Of aZ Q- HH W W O¢ COOfZ0 � C�Q of x0 W P W z g a¢ W a-(D co 0w Of x0 z co I W of // /// / co wn co CL f ;;'-rill � / 1 ,�/ � O z _ Y LL s w h 0 0 Q o aO O j OZ p a Z LL 0 h s W 3 a Z a ot a g -�. in g a w Q w p wo O <w a r a s z - az Mn WOO saoin�as6uuaaw5uaspiouRaH wif VaRi0�3 aNV�S171�O1S H12iON 42i 3J3��0�OOZS L86S-76£-SO£ 3O2]NOW 30 L1Nf1OO _ g Z40££l3`Aa)i pueliawwng z Remgb'HseasJan08LG4Z m W w L699Z'ON.b,.0 l3 1340W32j-lvlo2j3AAOO out`saoinJag 6uuaaul6u3 spIouRab = II � o � o �o �=o I _ Fi _ �m r p , YI o.o o„o o.o o.o II a- 30 DNIAk H L?ION Q �o CL Mg __ w Ln oG�mw �o J x3zz W U �X w �w w Oo � opw9 II =c�mw E-, wiz= II � _ xu rc w II rrc w3 rc II II x zpz x � h ' IL JI L ' L ro m w w DNIAk FLLAOS =o N po 00 — �4 d WOO saoinJas6uuaaw5uaspiouRaH wig VGlHMJ ONV�SI>1001S HiHON GH 303-nOD OOZS L869176£-SO£ 302]NOW HO L1Nf)00 Ra ueiawwn g o Z40££l3` 71 P S It Remgb'HseasJan08LG4Z ° J wm L6S9Z`oN VOl3 134OW32j 1b'��2�3WWO� a _ out`saoinJaS 6uuaaw6u3 spIouRab = _ s a - 9 ON - - s� QO - LU fn go tt tt � tt tt tt � X. 0 0 � ------------�L---- ——— m I DNlAk H L2IONCL z Q tt } tt tt w44 o w 'o Imo o 10 olff ®a� ® 7 W x� a' xa v a � pro — — — — — -- -- — -- DNIAk HLAOS „o woosaoln�as6uuaaul6uasplouRaH@wlf VORi0�3 ONV�SI71001SH12iON 02i303-n0000ZS wv, L869176£-SO£ 302]NOW 30 AiNf)00 _ g Z70££l3`Aa)j pueliawwng aoA a Remgb'HseasJan08L"E Q r w L699Z`oN VOl3 13QOW3cy 1dl.7cy3WW0.7 oul`saolnJag 6uuaaw6u3 splouRab = - r cz5-5 wo ®® Fo CL 0 wwwp 0 o Fz ppwi5 W - - erc 3 3 i �000� O - p C DNIAk H L2ION ° O w C - o ® zoWopo U w. �w g ® oNIrnHlnos f=== CL (£6l Q Y Y Y Y O 0 H O F— � J < J r p wm a a w[if wm a a O J 3:¢ 2 Q S Yw Yw Z Q z - o 00 ¢ Zd U a�x O °o U ui 1i .+ '� Q o pU)a ��' a��d�� 0 - 0 WOO saolnJas6uuaaul6uasplouRaH wlf VGIHMJ ONV�SI)iDOiS HiHON GH 353-nOD OOZS L86S 46£SO£ 302]NOW HO AiNf)00 n ry Z70££ 13`Aa)i pueliawwng ao� CC Remgb'H seasJan0 8L"E G o L699Z`oN VOl3 134OW32j-lvlo2j3WWOO - ° L1Jm a ouI`saoinJaS 6uuaaw6u3 splouRab _ _- oi o N $ - § 05 P o9 s§. T - o3i ;n2 i •"" - - - _ -- - L�� a-=0s - _ o Y< VFW o _ §i R - 3�K g g�€- "a$m =gmeo, J so a� uj w LLEE Gy Y=_ - - - F .s-. ��r 6 s - n- -- Y g$ (n `e'ER - - - - - - - ap» _ <� - gag d �§" - ;�& _ o§i G B e - - -m3- i�d ?myq 3 �os s=d �g3 �5 m off. - __ - .$R w p w H a'a 4,Eq fl ®G ®K z - - -� w m § p — w Go= wM a w1� 3 oNlrnxLxoN � �G �I- �woow arc o 0 a G w z Goo _ 77 ---- z CL j W p oNIrn x.LAOS` o J ww ¢ o $ 3a w _ J � e owa w WOO saolnJas6uuaaul6uasplouRaH wlr VGIHMJ ONV�SI>1001S HiHON GH 303-nOD OOZS wv, L869176£-SO£ 302]NOW HO AiNf)00 _ g Z40££l3`Aa)i pueliawwnS nOA a 'v— '�, - Remgb'HseasJan08LG4Z �= W w L699Z'ON V O l3 134OW32j-lvlo2j3WWOO ouI`saolnJaS 6uuaaul6u3 splouRab = oso 0 0 �� lii I�i O o spg- O O 00 - EH oor a moo z000e;w.Nmm - co __ co 0 a 0 -- Q --' Q 0 s. 0 Z \ Q O_ w H J ; U) w J 0\ F J w .s w O -xacc - - m.z O w o O og = w Z m w xvrv,ec 0 Q F- 'NIrv,SI Q Q N Q Ssw 0 W �O z� O 0 J w p U) CL x 0 0 ozp z og �oz g J o0o FpF1 Q �� \ �m I ¢ .0 m m �o= o =` F � LL z w9ao Noo w N w _ �� a�e p O + I— Q w J X � Q w w w w 0 w� z Z 0 w c= - �� ma O H O J w J (n Q - W o 0 �H H J7�H�, 7, �m` W U -- --� O Z o � w X o Z wz O_ Z Oo F— - a O _ os0 oy 1, - _ sa0 Y0.0 >� 0> o s 3o z WOO SGOIAJGSB jaaw5uaspiouAaH@wlr mI a ,NV�z mo HiHON GH 35 aoo; as : 30aNONJO#Nn a / ! zaa��,s m \ q\ E � } \ Aemqb'H L699Z aV 0 a g]GO§]�j-lv o�j3AAOO w AJGS BUIJGGUIBU3_:A \ ƒ / / « 2 \ § 2 lo « o \ \ \ \ 0. \ \» u2 - ` ` \ I \ / I \ \ z : -H-H H H H HL� ' E) }0 , f : . . e - , \ \ ® \ j j \. 2 : » 3 ^ / \ -- § \/ \\ . . . . \ ° \\ \ \ � o \\ \\ z- /[ \ \( ~ : \. j \ \ /\ \� \\ \ \� / 0, 0 § g - \\\\ W \ \ d\\ \ \ \ 7 �>01 0( - : \ n \ _ T- ::= I§ \ -`- /§ \ ; (){ 2 z : WOO saolnJas6uuaaul6uasplouRaH wlr VGIHMJ ONV�SI>1001S HiHON GH 303-nOD OOZS wv, L869176£-SO£ 302]NOW HO AiNf)00 _ g Z40££ 13`Aa)i pueliawwnS C'7 Remgb'HseasJan08LG4Z N w L699Z`oN VOl3 134OW32j-lvlo2j3WWOO - m ouI`saolnJaS 6uuaaw6u3 splouRabo = s 0 w o pp g a gF <zp - o =p �a ooz e6 J zo��zzo a6op� a om 0 pz _o�o�oaQo�yy _ z �o�LLmm _ "o=kLLo=` yomz .pz ..000�- 4 w3w'a yoyz awzwa aa�rcoy omJ- �p �yamo ao rcSmzmwa - o�z�� _`sag =TgaTgaN z aomzpoF_F�powzzmyop�wo o�wm F kop000zoLLzw z _'"zo gym«;m 4o��<r�� - o�=w£p-£pMH��amm _ o .m - Q o aaw - J o 0 o J F w ado y <aw� a�� oo U -8 ��~ - Y w�wzowo3woa3zo.000 Y -��m:wLLo�wa� OO O ww Food og: `oo��moy- J x3 z�wm 0 zmx 0 y«a�o�w ma <mz -�ooa (!1 o:�oa"-'z'oaiyw"�ow�LL��yoz � m O p Ln o <.��p�z�orooyyoy�zp ��z�o� - _ CD Q -WEN z � Q "owsoz oo�„�o�000� mpmmNa=om�o��pw�` o / v aEa _ s \ = z o m 3 d - \ a a o � m o a m H \rviry - Mo O H CDw O � a O J W w " 00 - w Q 0 z o m o Z :J Q s — H O mw O w X o W } _ o � W < o (n X s Z W _ " a W 3 17 d a to 0 m _ J f%1 i -wb� w� b� O D 17 o tom = 43 ui Project Specifications For 5200 College Road, Stock Island Supervisor of Elections Office Renovations April 7, 2023 rr� IVI ul�Nol.. N ��m� duigm �'Vil"muo W �� 5200 College Road —Supervisor of Elections TABLE OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1-3 (Not Used) DIVISION 4—MASONRY 042200 Concrete unit Masonry DIVISION 5—(Not Used) 054000 Cold Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 Rough Carpentry 062000 Finish Carpentry 064100 Architectural Wood Casework 066100 Quartz Surface Fabrications DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 Thermal Insulation DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 084313 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 085700 Aluminum Doors 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 9—FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board and Metal Stud Assemblies 093013 Tiling 095100 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 099000 Painting and Coating DIVISION 10—SPECIALTIES 102813 Toilet Accessories END TABLE OF CONTENTS 5200 College Road SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide concrete unit masonry where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts ad who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within thirty-five (35)calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's, Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. C. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. B. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-1 5200 College Road securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. B. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. For location of each type of concrete masonry unit, refer to the Drawings. B. CM Us: ASTM C 90 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net- area compressive strength of 2000 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch (10 mm) less-than- nominal dimensions. C. Dimensions: 1. Provide units of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. 2. Where dimensions are not shown on the Drawings, provide units having nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high by the depth shown or otherwise required. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-2 5200 College Road E. Provide accessory shapes as indicated or otherwise required. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. Comply with the following as minimums: 1. Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, using deformed bars for number 3 and larger. 2. Bending: AC1318. 3. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: Ladder type complying with ASTM A 951/A 951M. a. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. b. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. c. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. d. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. e. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches O.C. f. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with recommendations contained in CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices." 2.5 MORTAR A. Ingredients: 1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I. 2. Lime: a. Provide hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, or quicklime complying with ASTM C5. b. When quicklime is used, slake and then screen through a 16 mesh sieve. After slaking and screening, but before using, store and protect for not less than ten (10) days. 3. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter, and complying with ASTM C144. 4. Water: Provide water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. B. Mixing: 1. Provide mortar type "M" or type "S", as designated on the Drawings or otherwise rlirartarl by tha Arrhitart and in Arrnrrdanra with ACTM C'7Rn CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-3 5200 College Road 2. Proportions: a. For type "M" mortar, provide one part Portland cement to 1/4 part hydrated lime and 3-3/4 parts sand by volume. b. For type "S" mortar, provide one part Portland cement to 1/2 part hydrated lime and 4-1/2 parts sand by volume. 3. Mechanically mix in a batch mixer for not less than three minutes, using only sufficient water to produce a mortar which is spreadable and of a workable consistency. 4. Re-temper mortar with water, as required to maintain high plasticity. a. On mortar boards, re-temper only by adding water within a basin formed with mortar, and by working the mortar into the water. b. Discard and do not use mortar which is unused after 1-1/2 hours following initial mixing. 2.6 GROUT A. Ingredients: 1. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, type I. 2. Aggregate: Provide clean, sharp, well graded aggregate free from injurious amounts of dust, lumps, shale, alkali, surface coatings, and organic matter. 3. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specifically approved in advance by the Architect. 4. Water: Provide water free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. B. Mixing: 1. Provide "fine grout" or"course grout" as designated on the Drawings or otherwise directed by the Architect, and in accordance with ASTM C476. 2. When the minimum grout compressive strength is required to be more than 2000 psi, provide laboratory design mix prepared as required for design mixes of concrete under Section 03300 of these Specifications. 3. Proportions: a. For"fine grout," provide one part Portland cement to 2-1/4 parts minimum to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency. b. For"course grout," provide one part Portland cement to 3 parts maximum of damp loose sand to two parts coarse aggregate, with sufficient water to achieve fluid consistency. 4. "Fluid consistency" is interpreted as meaning as fluid as possible for pouring intimately in place without segregation. C. Use "fine grout" where called for on the Drawings,where the grout space is less than 3" in its least dimension, and where otherwise directed by the Architect or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-4 5200 College Road PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99 degrees F in the shade,with relative humidity less than 50%. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Lay only dry masonry units. 2. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. 3. Set units plumb, true to line, and with level courses accurately spaced. 4. Accurately fit the units to plumbing, ducts, openings, and other interfaces, neatly patching all holes. 5. Keep the walls continually clean, preventing grout and mortar stains. If grout does run over, clean immediately. B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide running bond with vertical joints located at center of masonry units in the alternative course below. C. Do not use chipped or broken units. If such units are discovered in the finished wall, the Architect may require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Laying up: 1. Place units in mortar with full shoved bed and head joints. 2. Align vertical cells of hollow units to maintain a clear and unobstructed system of flues. 3. Hold racking to an absolute minimum. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-5 5200 College Road E. Reinforcement: 1. Provide reinforcement as shown on the Drawings, fully embedded in grout and not in mortar or mortar joints. 2. Provide required metal accessories to ensure adequate alignment of steel during grout filling operations. F. Tooling: 1. Tool joints to a dense, smooth surface. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide joints of"concave" pattern throughout. 3.4 GROUTING A. Perform grouting in strict accordance with the provisions of the governing building code. 1. Solidly fill vertical cells containing reinforcement. 2. Consolidate grout at time of pour by puddling with a mechanical vibrator,filling all cells of the masonry, and then reconsolidating later by puddling before the plasticity is gone. 3.5 CLEANING A. Inspection and adjustment: 1. Upon completion of the work of this Section, make a thorough inspection of installed masonry and verify that units have been installed in accordance with the provisions of this Section. 2. Make necessary adjustments. B. Clean surfaces of masonry as required for proper application of the specified finishes. END OF SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04220-6 5200 College Road SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dimension lumber, including miscellaneous framing, blocking, nailers, grounds andfurring; wood sleepers, and rough opening framing for doors,windows, and roof openings. B. Construction panels, including plywood subflooring, wall sheathing, and communications and electrical room mounting boards. C. Accessories, including fasteners and anchors, connectors, gasket and flashing, and subfloor glue. D. Factory wood treatment, including preservative treatment and fire-retardant treatment. E. Reclaimed Lumber for general wood blocking, parapet coping blocking 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016116-Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B. Section 061100- Reclamation of Historic Lumber. C. Section 062000- Finish Carpentry. D. Section 072500-Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing. E. Section 061643-Gypsum Sheathing. F. Section 096429-Wood Strip and Plank Flooring 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA): 1. AFPA(WFCM) --Wood Frame Construction Manual for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. C. American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc. (ALSC). D. The Engineered Wood Association (APA): 1. APA PRP-108-- Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels (Form E445). E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A153/A153M --Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Ironand Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM D2898--Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire- Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 1 5200 College Road 3. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials. F. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): 1. AWPA U1 -- Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. G. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (including 2012 Supplement). H. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology (MIST). 1. Product Standards(PS): a. PS 1--Structural Plywood. b. PS 20--American Softwood Lumber Standard. I. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB): 1. SPIB (GR) --Grading Rules. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 -2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000- Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on factory wood treatment materials and processes, including manufacturer's technical notes and specifications, and application/installation instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentrymeet or exceed specified requirements. D. LEED Submittals: None. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if nograding agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meetingthe specified requirements. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 2 5200 College Road 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who providesgrading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: SPIB. B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing:APA PRP-108,Structural I Rated Sheathing, preservative and fire- retardant treated. 1. Exposure Class: Exterior. 2. Span Rating:As indicated on drawings, but not less than 24/0(610/0). 3. Thickness: As indicated on drawings, but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm), nominal. 4. Edges: Tongue and groove. 5. Product: "Exterior Fire-X Exterior" by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; orequal. a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, Class A B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm)thick; flame spread index of 25 or less,smoke developed index of 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Fasteners for High Humidity and Preservative-Treated Wood Locations: Hot-dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel. 2. Fasteners for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Used in Exterior Applications or Wetor Damp Locations (FBC-B SECTION 2304.9.5.3): Hot-dipped zinc-coated galvanized steel or stainless steel. a. Fasteners other than nails,wood screws and lag screws may be of mechanically-deposited zinc-coated steel; coating weight shall be in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 55 minimum. 3. Fasteners for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood Used in Interior Locations (FBC-B SECTION 2304.9.5.4): Fasteners for fire-retardant-treated wood used in interiorlocations shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (1) In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations, hot-dipped zinc-coatedga Iva nized steel or stainless steel. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 3 5200 College Road B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. C. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick, plate width, closed cellplastic foam from continuous rolls. D. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 076200-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Subfloor Glue:Waterproof,water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. F. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 072500-Weather Barriers. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use CategorySystem for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by anALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. General: a. Manufacturers: (1) Arch Wood Protection, Inc.:www.wolmanizedwood.com. (2) Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.:www.frtw.com. b. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percentfor lumber and 15 percent for plywood. c. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground. 2. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordancewith ASTM D2898. a. Applications: (1) Treat plywood wall sheathing used in exterior stud-framed wall assemblies. (2) Treat exterior rough carpentry items as indicated. b. Product: "Exterior Fire-V by Hoover Treated Wood Products, or equivalentby Arch Wood Protection. 3. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic)type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,with no evidence of significant combustionwhen test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Applications: (1) Treat communications and electrical room mounting boards. (2) Treat interior rough carpentry items as indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 4 5200 College Road (3) Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. C. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC313, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing,flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat lumber less than 18 inches (450 mm) above grade. e. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches (100 mm)and seal. B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncturegasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects thatwould lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion oferection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA(WFCM). D. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) of bearing at each end. E. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 5 5200 College Road 3.04 BLOCKING, HAILERS,AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction,framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Plywood Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs,with ends overfirm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. 1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing,weather lappingedges and ends. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studswith edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches (610 mm) on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge ofboard parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawncuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm)from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum. C. Variation from Plane(Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, andl/4 inch in 30 feet(7 mm in 10 m) maximum. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 6 5200 College Road 3.09 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 017419 -Construction Waste Management. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or"waste-to-energy"facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000- 7 5200 College Road SECTION 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items fabricated from reclaimed historic lumber, including: 1. Wood standing and running trim (e.g.,wall bases, window sills, chair rails). 2. Wood railing guards 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 061000- Rough Carpentry: Support framing,grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 099000- Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentryitems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Woodwork Institute (AWI): 1. AWI (QSI) --Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 8th edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings for all finish carpentry items. 1. Indicate materials; component profiles and dimensions; methods of fixation; assembly techniques;jointing details; back priming and finish; transitions; blocking; and accessories. 2. Include details showing type of end or termination. 3. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (1:8). B. Samples: 1. Wood Window Sills: Submit two samples 12 inch(300 mm) long. 062000- 1 FINISH CARPENTRY 5200 College Road 2. Wood Wall Base: AWI Profile "BAS1027". Submit two samples 12 inch (300 mm) long. 3. Wood Paneling: Submit two samples12 inch (300 mm) long. 4. Wood Flooring and Subflooring :Submit two samples 12 inch (300 mm) long. 5. Wood Railing Guard Cap: AWIProfile HRL 5021. Submit two samples 12 inch (300 mm) long. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified inthis section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Perform work in accordance with AWI (QSI) Custom Grade quality orbetter. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. 1. Interior Woodwork Items(e.g.,wall bases, and window sills): 2. For additional information, refer to Section 061100- Reclamation of Historic Lumber 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Reclaimed Historic Lumber: Refer to Section 061100- Reclamation of HistoricLumber. 2.03 FASTENINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; exposed fasteners are not permitted. B. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Nailers: Refer to Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. C. Primer: Low or Zero VOC Alkyd primer sealer. D. Wood Filler: Low or Zero VOC Solvent base,tinted to match surface finish color. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.05 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. 062000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY 5200 College Road D. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. E. Painting and Coating: For surface preparation and field-applied painting and coating requirements, refer to Section 099000-Painting and Coating. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section areplaced and ready to receive this work. C. For installation of recessed wood blocking, see Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI (QSI) requirements for Custom Grade. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1mm). Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners.Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 099000-Painting and Coating. C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm).END OF END OF SECTION 062000-3 FINISH CARPENTRY 5200 College Road SECTION 064100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Custom built-in cabinets and casework. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel sections, including but notlimited to posts, plates, etc. for support and bracing of architectural woodwork; bolts,anchors and other metal components not specified elsewhere. B. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing and plywood sheathing, used in conjunction with wood cabinets, casework, and other architectural woodwork. C. Section 062000-Finish Carpentry: Hardwood interior running trim. D. Section 066100 -Quartz Surfacing Fabrications: Countertops for custom built-in cabinetwork 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards, see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Hardboard Association (AHA): 1. AHA A135.4--Basic Hardboard. C. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A208.1 --American National Standard for Particleboard. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B18-- Fasteners. a. ASME B18.2.1 --Square and Hex Bolts and Screws(Inch Series). b. ASME B18.2.2-- Nuts for General Applications (Inch Series). c. ASME B18.6.1--Wood Screws(Inch Series). 064100-1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road d. ASME B18.21.1 --Lock Washers (Inch Series). e. ASME B18.22.1 --Plain Washers. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A307--Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60000 PSITensile Strength. 2. ASTM A325 --Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 3. ASTM A563--Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 4. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials. 5. ASTM F593 --Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,and Studs. 6. ASTM F594--Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. F. Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI): 1. AWI (QSI) --Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 2006, 8th Ed.,Version 2.0. 2. AWI P-200--Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; 1999, 7thEd., Version 1.2. G. American Wood-Preservers'Association (AWPA): 1. AWPA C2 -- Lumber,Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. H. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. BHMA A156.9 --American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). I. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building. 2. FBC-A-- Florida Building Code,Accessibility, 2020 edition. J. Hardwood Plywood Veneer Association (HPVA): 1. HPVA HP-1 --American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA LD-3-- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. L. Federal Specifications and Standards, U.S. General Services Administration (FS): 1. FS FF-B-588-- Bolt,Toggle; and Expansion Sleeve, Screw. 2. FS FF-N-105 -- Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes;Wire, Cut and Wrought. 3. FS FF-S-111 --Screw,Wood. 4. FS FF-S-325--Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion and Nail, Drive Screw(Devices, Anchoring, Masonry). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 064100-2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201-2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000- Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on wood treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide data for attachment hardware and finish hardware. a. Include evidence that products to be installed in this Project meet or exceed BHMA 156.9 Grade 1 requirements. b. Provide data and instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete and detailed shop drawings for all custom built-in cabinets and casework. 1. Indicate plan layouts and elevations, assembly methods, accessory listings, hardware locations, and schedule of finishes. 2. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft (1:8). 3. Coordination: a. Coordinate shop drawings for cabinets and casework with shop drawings for the following: (1) Miscellaneous steel posts, plates and other components specified in Section 055000- Metal Fabrications. (2) Wood stud framing and other rough carpentry specified in Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry. (3) Countertops for custom built-in cabinetwork specified in Section 066200- Quartz Surfacing Fabrications. (4) Metal furring, metal stud framing and backer plates specified in Section 092113 -Gypsum Board Assemblies. b. Shop drawings are to be unified and submitted jointly with product data. D. Samples: 1. Plastic Laminate: a. Preliminary Selection Samples: Submit three samples each, at least 2 x 3 inches in size, of complete range of plastic laminate manufacturer's plasticlaminate materials, for preliminary selections. b. Final Selection/Verification Samples: Submit three samples each, 12 x 12 inches in size, of preliminary selections, for final selections,verification and acceptance. 2. Quartz Surface Fabrications (Countertops, Backsplashes and End splashes)refer to Section 066100-Quartz Surface Fabrications 2. Hardware: Submit two samples of each type of hardware to be provided. 3. All samples will be reviewed by Architect before fabrication for Project, with final selection samples used for comparison inspections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom grade. B. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 064100-3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road 1. Contractor's personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity, and quality to that shown and specified. 2. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the American Woodwork Institute (AWI). 3. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Protect work from moisture damage and exposure to sunlight, humidity, and other conditions detrimental to appearance of wood. B. Cabinets and casework must be delivered, stored, and handled in a manner that will prevent damage and disfigurement. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install paneling when temperature or humidity conditions may have a detrimental effect on paneling. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. C. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Laminate Materials: 1. Formica Corp: www.formica.com. 2. Nevamar, International Paper: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. B. Particleboard: 1. Flakeboard Company Limited: www.flakeboard.com. C. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Accuride International Inc.: 12311 Shoemaker Avenue; Santa Fe Springs, CA90670; Tel: 562-903-0200. 2. Blum, by Julius Blum, Inc.: 7733 Old Plank Road; Stanley, NC 28164;Tel. 800-438-6788. 3. Colonial Bronze Company: 511 Winsted Road;Torrington, CT 06790;Tel: 860-489- 9233. 4. Garcy 5. Grant Slides &Track 6. Grass America, Inc.: P.O. Box 1019; 1202 Hwy 66 South; Kernersville, NC 064100-4 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road 27284;Tel: 800-334-3512. 7. Hager Hinge Company: St. Louis, MO 63104. 8. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company: 2700 Oak Industrial Drive NE; Grand Rapids, MI 49505;Tel: 800-253-1561. 9. Rakks Counter Support Brackets, by Ragine Corporation: Millis, Massachusetts02O54; Tel: 800-826-6006. 10. Salice America, Inc.: 2123 Crown Centre Drive; Charlotte, NC 28227;Tel. 800-222-9652. 11. Soss Invisible Hinges, by Universal Industrial Products Company:Tel: 800-922-6957; Local Rep: Access International Sales,Tel: 954-796-1683. 12. Stanley Hardware, by The Stanley Works:480 Myrtle Street; New Britain, CT06053; Tel: 800-337-4393. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Softwood Lumber: Refer to Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. 2. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality; plainsawn, worked to shapes indicated, maximum moisture content of 6 percent. B. Sheet Materials: 1. Softwood Plywood: Refer to Section 061000-Rough Carpentry. 2. Hardwood Plywood/Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Grade AA,Type as indicated; Graded in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density, made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces. a. Density: Medium,48-50 Ibs/cu ft b. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): (1) Flame Spread: 25 (2) Fuel Contributed: 10 (3) Smoke Developed: 25 c. Finish: (1) Paint or varnish all surfaces and edges not covered with plastic laminate. (2) At cutouts made for particleboard countertops, seal all edges to prevent water damage or swelling of material. d. Product: Duraflake FIR(as manufactured by Flakeboard), or equal. 4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick, smooth two sides (S2S). a. Comply with AWI P-200, Grade 1. C. Laminate Materials: 1. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, HGP;through color; color and finish as selected by Owner. 2. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate; colorwhite. 3. Sheet Metal: Sheet steel galvanized to 1.2 oz/sq ft(380 gm/sq m); 0.396 inch(1.0mm) thick. 064100-5 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road D. Quartz counter tops, backsplashes and end splashes, as specified on 066100-Quartz Surface Fabrications. 2.03 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. General: 1. Select material,type, size,and finish required by each substrate for secure attach ment/a ncho rage. 2. Use only stainless steel fasteners/anchors in the following applications: a. When fastener/anchor will be in contact with treated wood. b. When fastener/anchor will be exposed to view. c. When fastener/anchor will be located in an area where high humidity or moisture is anticipated (e.g., restroom). B. Fasteners: 1. Wood Screws:ASME B18.6.1. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A307. 3. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 4. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required to suit application. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 5. Nails: Select material,type, size, and finish required to suit application. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 3. Furnish anchors and inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Low-VOC type recommended by AWI to suit application. B. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, Sleepers and Grounds: Refer to Section 061000-Rough Carpentry. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. D. Miscellaneous Metal Attachment Accessories: See Section 055000- Metal Fabrications. 2.05 CABINET HARDWARE A. General: Comply with BHMA A156.9, and as specified herein. B. Hinges: 1. Doors 4 Feet(1.22 m) or Less in Height: Provide 1 pair per leaf. 2. Doors 4 Feet (1.22 m) or More in Height: Provide 1-1/2 pair per leaf. 3. Overlay Doors: Provide pivot type hinges. 4. Product: 064100-6 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road a. Horizontal Stiles: Hager No. 1043-US26D, or equal. b. Vertical Stiles: Hager No. 1044-US26D,or equal. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: 6-5/16" Satin Stainless Steel Rod mounted onto smaller diameter posts. 1. Drawers 24 Inches (610 mm)or Less in Width: Provide 1 pull per drawer. 2. Drawers over 24 Inches (610 mm) in Width: Provide 2 pulls per drawer. 3. Doors: Provide 1 pull per door leaf. 4. Product: DP55A, Satin Stainless Steel (SSS) manufactured by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc., or equal. D. Drawer Slides: 1. Type 1: Medium-duty, full-extension, side-mount drawer slides with steel ball bearings, handed lever disconnect, vertical cam adjustment, hold-in detents and self- closing feature; 0.050 inch slide space; clear zinc finish. a. Applications: Drawers up to 16 inches (406 mm)wide in base cabinets. b. Load Rating: Up to 100 Ibs per pair. c. Product: Accuride Model 3832SC, or equal. 2. Type 2: Heavy-duty, full-extension, side-mount drawer slides with steel ball bearings, rail/mount disconnect,vertical cam adjustment, hold-in detents; 0.050inch slide space; clear zinc finish. a. Applications: Drawers 16 inches (406 mm)to 27 inches (686 mm)wide in base cabinets, including file drawers. b. Load Rating: Up to 150 Ibs per pair. c. Product: Accuride Model 4032, or equal. E. Drawer Stops: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: 1. General: a. Provide adjustable shelves for cabinets with the following hardware,to provide shelf adjustment on 1/2 inch centers, except where drawings indicate fixed shelving. b. Provide cantilever type shelf standards and cantilever brackets where indicated. For shelves longer than 48 inches, support at intermediate points at not more than 48 inches spacing by cantilever shelf standards and cantilever brackets. 2. Shelf End Standards: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 255AL, or equal. 3. Shelf Support Clips: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 256AL, or equal. 4. Shelf Standards for Cantilever Brackets: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 80A, or equal. 5. Cantilever Shelf Brackets: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 180A, or equal. H. Concealed Hinges for Wood Casework: Concealed, zinc die-cast, screw-on, self-closing type; degree of opening as selected. 1. Provide 1-1/2 pair per leaf. 064100-7 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road 2. Product: a. For door thickness 3/4 inch to 1-1/32 inches: Salice Series 200, or equal. b. For door thickness up to 1-1/2 inches, and other special applications: Salice Series F, or equal. I. Countertop Support Brackets: Provide heavy-gage welded Stainless Steel bracket,framed into cavity of partition, as shown on details 1 and 2 on Sheet A15.1. J. Fasteners: 1. Assembly Fasteners: a. Product: Knape and Vogt Type 516 Tite-Joint, or equal. 2. Screws: ASME B18.6.1, Group,Type and Class as applicable. 3. Anchoring Devices: FS FF-S-325, Group,Type and Class as applicable. 4. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588,Type I, Class A, Style 2. 5. Nuts: ASTM F594 stainless steel, or ASTM A563 corrosion-resistant steel. 6. Bolts: ASTM F593 stainless steel, or ASTM A325 heavy, hexagon head bolts, corrosion-resistant steel. K. Plastic Grommets: Provide quantity and sizes as required for miscellaneous cut-out openings; color as selected by Architect. L. Paper Lots: Provide molded plastic, paper lot liner with 1/4 inch lip; color as selected by Architect. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate work of this Section in conformance with AWI P-200, Custom Grade quality. a. Architectural Cabinets and Casework: (1) Thicknesses of material shall be not less than minimums indicated in AWIP-200, Section 400-G-8 standards. (2) Thickness of shelving material shall be not less than minimums indicated in AWI P-200, Section 400-G-8 standards for type of material used. (a) All shelves in each cabinet unit shall be of same thickness, based on longest span. (3) Casework dimensions as indicated on drawings, or if not indicated as per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-9 standards for"Casework Standard Dimensions". (a) Comply with height and clearance requirements of FBC-A and other applicable accessibility requirements. (b) Where there is a discrepancy between dimensions indicated on drawings and referenced AWI standards, request direction from Architect. (4) Fabricate cabinets per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-10 standards for"Flush Overlay Construction"; provide optional blocking for pivot hinges. (a) HPDL cabinets and casework to be finished per AWI P-200, Section400C- series standards. (b) Direction and matching of pattern/grain of Type 2 HPDL finish shall 064100-8 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road be per AWI P-200, Section 400-B-S-1 for Custom Grade; door and drawer face matching per"door set match" pattern. (5) Fabricate and install cabinet hardware per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-14 standards. (6) Where plastic laminate finish is indicated for cabinets, direction and matching of pattern/grain shall be per AWI P-200, Section 400-B-S-1 for Custom Grade; door and drawer face matching per"door set match" pattern. 2. Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas 3. Field Dimensions: Woodwork manufacturer to be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and to show on shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. Contractor and woodwork manufacturer to cooperate as necessary to establish and maintain these field dimensions. 4. Complete fabrication processes, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, prior to shipment to project site, to maximum extent possible. Dissemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation, permitting passage through building openings. 5. Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece forfull length only. 6. Shop-prepare and identify paneling sheets and other wood components for sequenced grain matching during site erection. 7. Factory-cut openings to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. a. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. b. Smooth edges of cutouts and other openings, where located in countertops. 8. Apply plastic laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 9. Coordinate with electrical requirements and provide raceways,with complete access panels for electrical. B. Custom Built-in Architectural Cabinets and Casework: 1. Plastic Laminate (HPDL) Cabinets and Casework: a. AWI P-200, Section 400B, Custom grade. b. Core: Particleboard or plywood, per specified grade and standard. c. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be finished with plastic laminate (HPDL). d. Plastic Laminate Color Schedule:To be selected by Architect, from manufacturer's complete range of colors,textures, and sheens. 2. Quartz Surfacing Countertops, Backsplashes and End splashes: Refer to Section 066200-Quartz Surfacing Fabrications. 3. Cabinet Hardware and Accessory Materials: 064100-9 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road a. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials to comply with requirements indicated for design, material, finish, and manufacturer. Install in accordance with hardware manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Hinges: Concealed, self-closing. c. Drawer Slides: Provide one pair drawer slides per drawer; slide type as follows: (1) Drawer up to 16 inches (406 mm)wide: Type 1 drawer slides. (2) Drawer 16 inches (406 mm)to 27 inches (686 mm)wide, including file drawers: Type 2 drawer slides. d. Pulls: Stainless Steel Rod Type e. Locks: Custom grade, master key capabilities. f. Exposed Finishes: Satin chrome, except as otherwise indicated. 2.07 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA C2, using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. B. Re-dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 15 percent moisture content. 2.08 SHOP FINISHING A. Factory Finishing:To the greatest extent possible,finish work of this Section at factory. Defer only final touch-up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Quality Standard: 1. Cabinets and Casework with High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Finish: Comply with AWI P-200, Section 40013-S-1 standards for Custom Grade. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork. D. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. E. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. F. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Openings for Cabinetwork: Supplier to make request to Contractor,for temporary openings in walls or windows which may be required for passing large sections of cabinetwork into building and spaces where work will be installed.This applies only to such items that cannot be accommodated through permanent openings. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. cabinets. 064100-10 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road 1. Coordinate work of this section with requirements of Section 061000- Rough Carpentry, to ensure proper installation of recessed wood blocking related to casework or cabinets. C. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. D. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. E. Prior to installing work of this Section, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. F. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install work in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1700, Custom quality. 2. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at site for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. 3. Coordinate work with other trades affected by this installation. a. Moving Items: If it is necessary for other trades to move cabinetwork to make final connections, cabinetwork supplier shall assist such trades in moving such cabinetwork and shall be on the job to carefully level and adjust cabinetwork as last connections are made. 4. Give particular attention to work of supporting and attachment items, so as not to delay progress. 5. Discard materials which are unsound,warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, too small to fabricate work with minimum joints, or defective fabrication with respect to surface, size, profile, or pattern. 6. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. a. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. b. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. c. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. d. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. e. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops. f. Secure cabinet bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 064100-11 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road g. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. h. Install prefinished paneling with nails at 16 inch (400 mm) on center, except as otherwise indicated;where indicated, install paneling with beveled wood rails. 7. Coordinate the installation of firestopping behind paneling. 8. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch(1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. a. Refinish cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 9. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and accepted shop drawings. B. Cabinets and Casework: 1. General: a. Install without distortion for proper opening and accurate alignment of doors and drawers. b. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers. c. Anchor tops to base units and other support systems. d. Erect straight, level and plumb to tolerances, and securely anchor in place. e. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent work. f. Cut and fit around pipes, ducts, and other items. 2. Base Cabinets: a. Set base cabinets in line and plumbed, and leveled by means of wood shims, orby adjustable levelers provided in each cabinet unit. b. Secure base units together with concealed galvanized steel bolts,washers and nuts. c. Secure base cabinets to masonry walls and to concrete floors at concealed locations, near each end, with 1/4 inch diameter zinc-plated anchors or toggles. d. Secure base cabinets to wood blocking in metal stud partitions and furred areas at concealed locations near each end, with 1/4 inch diameter zinc-plated screws. 3. Cabinet Tops: a. Field cut and scribe cabinet tops and splashes as required to fit job conditions. Quartz surface tops to be placed on base cabinets, carefully fitting all field joints. b. Draw countertop and backsplash joints tight with concealed "tite-joint"type fasteners. c. Quartz surface countertop, backsplash and end splash field joints to be sealed watertight on assembly with mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Stainless steel sinks to be set in mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Secure tops to base cabinets with galvanized screws from inside cabinets. d. Cabinet tops not supported on base cabinets to be secured to walls at side and rear with wood cleats. Support and secure countertops at intermediate points with metal brackets and zinc-plated screws. 4. Wall Cabinets: a. Carefully align wall units, level, and firmly anchor to wall. 064100-12 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road b. At furred or stud-framed walls/partitions, install wall cabinets with sheet metal screw anchors into backing plates attached to metal studs or furring. (1) Coordinate placement and installation of backer plates with work installation of stud framing and furring, before installation of gypsum board. (2) Attach cabinet unit using sufficient number of anchors to support weight of cabinet and anticipated load. Anchors to be spaced maximum 16 inches on center,with not less than 4 anchors per unit; minimum 2 anchors to be installed in top mounting rail, and minimum 2 anchors in bottom rail. c. At masonry walls (without furring), anchor wall cabinets with sheet metal screws or machine screws in concrete expansion anchors or toggles. d. Scribe fillers where required, fit and install, to produce a neat closure between building walls and cabinet units. 5. Adjustable Shelving: a. Install wood and plastic laminate finished wood shelving where indicated in cabinetwork, supported by specified end standards and clips. b. For shelves longer than 48 inches, support at intermediate points at not over 48 inches spacing by specified cantilever shelf standards and cantilever brackets. c. Erect shelf standards plumb, and secure with zinc-plated steel screws. 6. Fixed Shelving: a. Install wood and plastic laminate shelving where indicated in cabinetwork. b. Fixed shelving in open and closed cabinets to be factory-built into cabinets. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm). C. Maximum Offset in Surface Alignment: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Offset in Revealed Adjoining Surface: 1/8 inch. E. Plumb and Level: 1/8 inch in 8 ft., maximum. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged work or replace with new to eliminate defects. B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. C. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. D. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. E. Touch-up factory applied finishes, to restore finish on joints and damaged or soiled areas. Completed work shall have uniform finish throughout. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean all surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide protection and maintain installed condition until Substantial Completion. 064100-13 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road C. Remove all protective coatings at time of Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 064100-14 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 5200 College Road SECTION 066100 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 064100-Architectural Wood Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards, see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C97--Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. 2. ASTM C99 --Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. 3. ASTM C170--Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. 4. ASTM C370-- Moisture Expansion. 5. ASTM C501 -- Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Tile to Taber Abraser. 6. ASTM C482 -- Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C484--Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile. 8. ASTM C531 -- Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical- Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concrete. 9. ASTM C648-- Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 10. ASTM C1026-- Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze Thaw Cycling. 11. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials. 12. ASTM E662--Smoke Density. C. International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (ISSFA): 1. ISSFA-2--Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material. D. Marble Institute of America, Inc. (MIA): 1. MIA(DSDM) --Dimensional Stone Design Manual. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA LD 3 -- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. F. U.S. Product Standards(PS): 1. PS 1--Structural Plywood 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 066100- 1 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 -2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000- Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete detailed shop drawings showing installation of quartz surfacing fabrications. 1. General: a. Indicate dimensions,thicknesses, required clearances,tolerances, materials, colors, finishes, fabrication details,field jointing, adjacent construction, design load parameters, methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages. b. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, hardware and accessories. 2. Countertops: Coordinate and submit shop drawings required in this section with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in Section 064100—Architectural Wood Casework. D. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns; and samples of actual product representing manufacturer's full range of available surface finish options. 2. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches(150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, pattern and surface finish. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. F. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of the products and assemblies specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience and certified in writing by the countertop manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS 066100-2 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Quality Standard: Same as custom built-in cabinets and casework; see Section 064100- Architectural Wood Casework. B. Quartz Surfacing: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin self-supporting over structural members. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/8 inch (1 cm), 3/4 inch (2 cm) or 1-1/4 inches (3 cm), as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, provide 3/4 inch (2 cm). 2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Shall comply with ISSFA- 2 and NEMA LD 3; high-performance polyester resin, unfilled, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. NSF approved for food contact. 3. Performance Requirements: a. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Flame spread 25, maximum;smoke developed 450, maximum. b. Moisture Absorption (ASTM C97): 0.02 percent. c. Modulus of Rupture (ASTM C99): 6,800 psi. d. Compressive Strength (ASTM C170): 24,750 psi. e. Moisture Expansion (ASTM C370): Less than 0.01. f. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C501): 223. g. Bond Strength (ASTM C482): 205 psi. h. Thermal Shock(ASTM C484): Passes at 5 cycles. i. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM C531): 0.000012 inch/degree F. j. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648): 3,661 Ibf. k. Resistance to Freeze Thaw Cycling (ASTM C1026): Unaffected at 15 cycles. I. Stain Resistance(ANSI Z124.6): Unaffected. 4. Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: (1) Cambria USA; 11000 West 78 Street, Suite 220; Eden Prairie, MN 55344;Tel. 866-226-2742; www.cambriausa.com (Florida Sales Rep.: Georgia Farmer;Tel. 952-944-1676; Cell. 612-751-6962; email Georgia.Farmer@CambriaUSA.com). b. Other Manufacturers: (1) Caesarstone Corporation: www.caesarstoneus.com (2) Seieffe Corporation: www.okite.us. C. Accessory Materials: 1. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm)thick;join lengths using metal splines. a. For additional information, refer to Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. 066100-3 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road 2. Adhesives: a. Mounting Adhesive: Chemical-resistant waterproof structural grade"50-year" silicone or epoxy adhesive of a type recommended by manufacturer for materials being joined, application and conditions of use. (1) Product: "Two-Part Acrylic Adhesive" by Cambria, or equal by one of the following: (a) Akemi North America. (b) Bonstone Material Corporation. (c) Tenax USA. b. Quartz Surfacing Adhesive: Chemical-resistant waterproof epoxy or polyester adhesive of a type recommended by manufacturer for materials being joined, application and conditions of use. (1) Adhesive which will be visible in finished Work shall be tinted to match quartz surface. (2) Product: "Two-Part Acrylic Adhesive" by Cambria, or equal by one of the following: (a) Akemi North America. (b) Bonstone Material Corporation. (c) Tenax USA. 3. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear. 4. Solvent: Denatured alcohol for cleaning quartz surfacing, to assure adhesion of adhesives and sealants. 5. Cleaning Agents: Mild soap and water. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Inspect materials for defects prior to fabrication. 2. Layout quartz surfacing fabrications to minimize joints and avoid L-shaped pieces of quartz surfacing, and fabricate with hairline joints. 3. Shop-fabricate quartz surfacing components to the greatest extent practical; comply with the MIA(DSDM). 4. Fabricate quartz surfacing components in the largest sections practicable,with exposed surface of joints flush. 5. Join lengths of quartz surfacing materials using best method recommended by manufacturer. 6. Cut and polish with water-cooled power tools. 7. Cutouts shall have a minimum of 3/8 inch (1 cm) radius. 8. Polish exposed edges (including edges of cutouts)that will be exposed in finished Work. 9. Laminate layers of quartz surfacing as required to create built-up edges, following procedures recommended by the manufacturer. B. Countertops: 1. Material: Quartz surfacing. a. Thickness: As indicated on drawings; if not indicated, provide 3/4 inch (2 cm)except at exposed edges(see Exposed Edge Detail). 066100-4 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road b. Color and Pattern:To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors and patterns. 2. Fabricate countertops to overhang 1 inch (25 mm) beyond fronts and ends of cabinet or wall beneath, except at edges abutting adjacent cabinet or wall finish. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. 4. Exposed Edge Detail: Exposed edges to be built up to 1-1/2 inch (4 cm)thick, and finished with edge profile as indicated on drawings. 5. Exposed Surface Finish:To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of surface finish options. 6. Secure countertop to base cabinet or wall beneath, as applicable, with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue, per approved shop drawings. C. Backsplashes and End splashes: 1. Material: Quartz surfacing. a. Thickness: As indicated on drawings; if not indicated, provide 3/4 inch (2 cm)x 6 inch (15.24 cm) b. Color and Pattern:To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors and patterns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. D. Site Verification: 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements prior to installation. 2. Verify that substrates supporting quartz surfaces are plumb, level and flat to withinl/8 inch in 10 ft, and that all necessary supports and blocking are in place. 3. Base cabinets shall be secured to adjoining units and back wall. E. Inspect quartz surface materials for defects prior to installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings 066100-5 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road B. Preliminary Installation: 1. Position materials to verify the correct size. 2. If size adjustments, or additional fabrication is necessary, use water-cooled tools. Protect jobsite and surface from dust and water. Perform work away from installation site if possible. 3. Allow gaps for expansion of not less than 1/8 inch (1.5 mm) per 10 ft when installed between walls or other fixed structure. C. Permanent Installation: 1. After verification of fit and finish, clean substrate; remove loose and foreign matter which may interfere with adhesion. Clean quartz surface backside and joints usingdenatured alcohol. 2. Horizontal Surface: Apply continuous bead of mounting adhesive around perimeter of structural substrate and supports. 3. Vertical Surface: Apply continuous bead of mounting adhesive around perimeter. In addition, apply 1/4 inch mounting adhesive bead every 8 inches on vertical center. 4. Install quartz surfacing plumb, level, square and flat,to within 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non- cumulative. 5. Align adjacent pieces in same plane. 6. Securely attach quartz surfacing fabrications to cabinets or wall, as applicable, using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. D. Joints: 1. Joints between Adjacent Pieces of Quartz Surfacing: a. Joints shall be flush,tight fitting, level and neat. b. Securely join adjacent pieces using specified Quartz Surfacing Adhesive; fill joints level to polished surface. c. Secure adjacent quartz surfaces with vacuum clamps until adhesive hardens. 2. Joints between Quartz Surfacing and Other Materials or Finishes: Seal joint between quartz surfacing fabrications and adjacent construction, using specified Joint Sealant. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), maximum. B. Offset from Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum; 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum. C. Joint Width between Adjacent Pieces of Quartz Surfacing: Hairline. D. Surface Lippage at Joints between Adjacent Pieces of Quartz Surfacing: Exposed surfaces shall be flush,with no lippage. E. Field Joints (except Joints between Adjacent Pieces of Quartz Surfacing): 1/8 inch (3mm) wide, maximum. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 066100-6 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 066100-7 QUARTZ SURFACE FABRICATIONS 5200 College Road SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation in exterior stud-framed wall construction, between exterior wall sheathing and furred interior wall finish. B. Batt insulation in exterior stud-framed soffit construction. C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 042000-Unit Masonry Assemblies: CMU walls. B. Section 054000-Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Stud framing system for exterior walls. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C578--Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 2. ASTM C665 --Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 3. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials. 4. ASTM E136 --Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical TubeFurnace At 750 Degrees C. C. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building(including 2020 Supplement). 2. FBC-EC-- Florida Building Code, Energy Conservation (including 2020 Supplement). D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 072100- 1 THERMAL INSULATION 5200 College Road 1. NFPA 285 -- Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Conservation Requirements:Thermal insulation installed in exterior wall assemblies of the building envelope shall comply with the following: 1. Comply with requirements of FBC-EC, except as follows: a. Historic Property Exception:The existing building meets the requirements specified in FBC-EC SECTION 101.4.2 for designation as a historic property, and therefore is exempt from compliance with requirements of FBC-EC. 2. Thermal Resistance (R-factor): a. Exterior Walls: Min. R-19 b. Exterior Soffits: Min. R-19 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 -2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000- Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation in Metal Stud Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder/facing. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTMC665; friction fit. 1. Flammability (ASTM E84): a. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136,except for facing, if any. 3. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 4. Thermal Resistance: As indicated on drawings; if not indicated on drawings provide R-19 min. a. For additional requirements, refer to PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. 5. Thickness: As indicated on drawings; if not indicated, then as required to achieve required thermal resistance. 6. Facing: Unfaced. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 072100-2 THERMAL INSULATION 5200 College Road b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by insulation manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Tape insulation batts in place. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION 072100-3 THERMAL INSULATION 5200 College Road SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior and exterior steel doors and frames. B. Steel door frames for interior wood doors. C. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 033000-Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 042000- Unit Masonry Assemblies. C. Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. D. Section 079005 -Joint Sealers. E. Section 081416- Flush Wood Doors. F. Section 087100-Door Hardware. G. Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Non-loadbearing metal framing. H. Section 099000- Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors and frames. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 --Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors. 2. ANSI/AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS--Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors. C. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A250.4--American National Standard Test Procedure and AcceptanceCriteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. 2. ANSI A250.6-- Hardware on Standard Steel Doors(Reinforcement-Application). 3. ANSI A250.8--SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doorsand Frames. 4. ANSI A250.10--Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted SteelSurfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI A250.11 -- Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 081113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7 --Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A591/A591M --Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Weight(Mass)Applications. 2. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A1008/A1008M --Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy withlmproved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 4. ASTM A1011/A1011M -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. 5. ASTM E336 -- Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms in Buildings. 6. ASTM E413 --Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 7. ASTM E488/E488M --Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concreteand Masonry Elements 8. ASTM E1408--Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems. F. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. BHMA A156.115-- Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames. G. Door Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. DHI A115.1 --Specifications for Preparation of 1-3/8" and 1-3/4" Standard SteelDoors and Steel Frames for Series 1000 Mortise Locks and Latches. a. DHI A115.1G -- Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. H. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 2. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (Current Edition). 1. FBC-A-- Florida Building Code, Accessibility(Current edition). 3. FBC-TP-- Florida Building Code,Test Protocols for HVHZ. a. FBC-TP TAS-201-- Impact Test Procedures. b. FBC-TP TAS-202 --Criteria for Testing Impact & Nonimpact ResistantBuilding Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure. c. FBC-TP TAS-203--Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading. I. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA): A division of NAAMM. J. Master Painters Institute (MPI): 1. MPI (APL)-- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List. 2. MPI (APSM) -- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting SpecificationManual. K. The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers(NAAMM): 1. NAAMM/HMMA 820-- Hollow Metal Frames (including TN01 and TN02). 081113 -2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road L. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA): Refer to WDMA. M. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80--Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. N. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. SDI 111 -- Recommended Standard Details for Steel Doors& Frames. 2. SDI 113 --Standard Practice for Determining the Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies 3. SDI 122 -- Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. O. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1. UBC 43.2--Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. P. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA). 1.04 DESIGN & PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS- EXTERIOR OPENINGS A. General: Design, materials, construction and quality of exterior steel door assemblies shall comply with design criteria specified in the Contract Documents and applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16 (including HVHZ provisions), and ASCE 7. 1. Refer to FBC-B SECTION 1620 for wind loads, except that minimum Basic Wind Speed shall be as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Structural Drawings. B. Design Loads: Exterior steel door components and assemblies shall comply with requirements of governing building code, criteria indicated on the Structural Drawings, and as follows: 1. Exterior steel door assemblies shall be designed and constructed to be of sufficient strength to support the estimated or actual imposed dead, live, wind, and any other loads, both during construction and after completion of the structure,without exceeding the allowable materials stresses specified by the governing building code. 2. Wind Load Design Criteria: a. Building Risk Category(FBC-B TABLE 1604.5 and ASCE 7 Table 1-1): III. b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated on structural drawings. c. Wind Exposure Category(FBC-B SECTION 1620.3): C. d. Enclosure Classification: Enclosed Building. e. Roof Height: As indicated on drawings. f. Building Width: As indicated on drawings. 3. Maximum Design Pressure (MDP) Rating (per Product Approval): Provide steel door components and assemblies that are identical to systems that have been successfully tested and approved for use in HVHZ, with MDP rating equal to or greater than pressures indicated on the drawings. C. Testing-Product Approval: Comply with applicable requirements of the FLORIDABUILDING CODE, including but not limited to the following: 1. Exterior steel door assemblies shall be tested in accordance with: a. Quality control test methods intended to confirm compliance with the large missile impact and wind load requirements of FBC-B CHAPTERS 15 and 16, including FBC-B 081113 -3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road SECTIONS 1625 and 1626 and FBC-TP TAS-201,TAS-202and TAS-203. b. Requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2411.3.2, FBC-TP TAS-202, and provisions from ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, and the forced entry prevention requirements of the AAMA 1302.5 and AAMA 1303.5. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200 -General Conditions (AIA A201 - 2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with referenced standards. 1. Include manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 2. Product Approval (Exterior Doors): Submit copies of current Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA) indicating conformance with applicable requirements of Florida Building Code (FBC), including but not limited to design pressures and large and small missile impact tests. a. Include copies of evidence submitted with Product Approval, including but not limited To drawings, test reports, calculations, and material certifications. b. Indicate options selected for this project. C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings showing all steel door and frame assemblies indicated in the drawings. 1. Indicate the following: a. Door, frame, and hardware schedule, in accordance with SDI 111. b. Door frame types and profiles; materials and details of design and construction; and hardware locations, and reinforcement type and locations. c. Interface with wall construction, including furring, framing, and interior wall finishes; anchorage and fastening methods; and methods of assembling sections, and finish requirements. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Indicate applicable fire-rating and label. 3. Exterior Openings: Provide project-specific design and engineering calculations, establishing conformance with applicable requirements of governing building codeand specified Design & Performance Requirements. Submit shop drawings and engineering calculations, signed and sealed by a qualified Florida registered professional engineer. D. LEED Submittals: None. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-rated Assemblies: 1. Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80, and tested, listed and labeled by a nationally recognized independent testing agency. 2. The label shall comply with requirements of NFPA 80, and shall be permanently affixed to the door or frame. B. Certifications: 081113 -4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road 1. Exterior Door Certification: For exterior door assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification for each door and frame assembly constructed in accordance with Miami- Dade County product approval single listing with specified door, door frame, and hardware, demonstrating compliance with specified Design & Performance Requirements. 2. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification for each door and frame assembly constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 3. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards. C. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver steel doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory-finished doors. B. Inspect steel doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect and Owner. Remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. D. Deliver all doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner to not delay progress of other trades. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Ingersoll-Rand/Steelcraft. B. Amweld/ Firedoor. C. Next Door Company. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames: 1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS. 2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled,ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS TypeB. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed),ASTM A653/A653M,with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum). B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel;ASTM A591/A591M, coating 40Z(12G), minimum. C. Finish Materials: 081113 -5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road 1. Shop-Applied Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. a. Coordinate with paint to be used for field finishing; refer to Section 099000 - Painting and Coating. 2. Field-Applied Protective Coating(for back-coating of frame prior to grouting): a. Automotive Undercoating: Premium quality,water-based, high-build, rubberized automotive undercoating with excellent coverage and corrosion corrosion-resistance performance. b. Epoxy Mastic Coating: Premium quality, two-component, high-build, self- priming, amido amine epoxy, meeting requirements of MPI (APL)#108. D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout; gypsum-based products are prohibited. 1. Grout shall conform to requirements of the door assembly Product Approval NOA, and the following: a. Compressive Strength: 3000 PSI. b. Slump: Maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. 2. For additional information, refer to Section 033000-Cast-In-Place Concrete. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber,fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. 1. For additional information, refer to Section 087100-Door Hardware. F. Bolts and Anchors: 1. Existing Wall Anchors: 3/8-inch diameter, flat-head, sleeve-type, expansion anchor; tested to ASTM E488/E488M criteria; length and minimum embed depth per door manufacturer's Product Approval. 2.03 DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: 1. Accessibility: Comply with FBC-A. 2. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard and as follows: a. Exterior Door Assemblies: In accordance with Miami-Dade Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA). 3. Galvanizing: All components to be hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed),ASTM A653/A653M,with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum). 4. Finish: All components to be factory-primed, ready for field finishing. a. For field finishing requirements, refer to Section 099000 - Painting and Coating. 5. Fire-Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80; UL listed. a. Affix permanent labels attesting to fire resistance. b. Provide manufacturer's certificate that oversized openings have been constructed in accordance with all other applicable requirements for labeled door construction. 6. STC Rating: 081113 -6 HOLLOW METAL DOORSAND FRAMES 5200 College Road a. Exterior Openings: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,tested in accordance with ASTM E336 or ASTM E1408. b. Interior Openings: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E336 or ASTM E1408. 7. Exterior Openings: a. Core Construction: Provide "polystyrene foam core", except where"steel- stiffened core" or"temperature rise mineral fiber core" is indicated. b. Weatherstripping: In accordance with Miami-Dade Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA). For additional information, refer to Section 087100 - Door Hardware. c. Any and all products shall be permanently labeled with manufacturer's name, city, state, and the following: (1) "Miami-Dade County Product Control Approved". 8. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound- rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. B. Doors: 1. Grade: a. Interior: ANSI A250.8 Level 2 (heavy-duty), Model 2 (seamless design, fully welded). b. Exterior: ANSI A250.8 Level 3 (extra heavy-duty), Model 2 (seamless design,fully welded). 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). 3. Door Top Closures: Manufacturer's standard closure channel, flush with top of faces and edges. a. Provide top closure at all doors. 4. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 5. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 6. Finish: Factory-primed,for field finishing. C. Frames: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 (heavy-duty) Doors: 16 gage frame. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 (extra heavy-duty) Doors: 16 or 14 gage frame. 2. Provide continuous full-profile welded unit type frames. a. Weld miter joints between head and jamb faces completely along their length either internally or externally. b. Internally weld perimeter profile joints full length of soffit and rabbets with hairline seams on external meeting surfaces. c. Grind and finish face joints smooth. 3. Frame Profile: Double rabbet,with equal rabbet depth. a. Face Width: 2 inches. b. Jamb Depth: As indicated in drawings; not less than 5-3/4 inches. c. Rabbet Depth: 1-15/16 inch; typical at both rabbets of each frame. d. Existing Wall Anchors: Holes for jamb anchor bolts shall be located at the center of 081113 -7 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road the soffit, equidistant from both faces; spacing per Product Approval NOA. 4. Finish: Factory-primed,for field finishing. D. Frame Anchors: 1. Jamb Anchors: a. Exterior Opening at CMU/Concrete Wall: Provide jamb anchors in accordance with requirements of the applicable Miami-Dade County Product Control Notice of Acceptance (NOA). (1) Type: Existing wall anchor with 3/8-inch diameter, sleeve-type expansion anchor bolt. b. Interior Opening at CMU/Concrete Walls, where such opening is subject to wind load and/or missile impact: Same as Exterior Opening at CMU/Concrete Wall. c. Interior Opening at CMU/Concrete Walls,where such opening is not subject to wind load or missile impact: (1) Type: Existing wall anchor with concealed 3/8-inch diameter, sleeve-type expansion anchor bolt. (a) Provide plastic plug at each anchor hole,to conceal head of anchor bolt. (2) Provide one jamb anchor at 6 inches from top of jamb and one at 6 inches from bottom, plus one jamb anchor per 24 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof between top and bottom anchors; not less than 4 anchors per jamb. 2. Interior Opening at Stud-framed Drywall Partition: (1) Manufacturer's standard steel stud anchors welded to frame, to accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension on fully-welded frame;galvanized;two#12 SMS per anchor. (2) Provide one jamb anchor per 30 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof, not less than 3 anchors per jamb. 2. Head/Ceiling Strut Anchors: Provide where indicated in drawings; if not indicated, provide per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Floor Anchors (Interior Opening at Stud-framed Drywall Partition): Steel angle clip type; provide one anchor per jamb. a. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. b. Fasteners: Two per jamb, minimum. c. Weld anchor to bottom of each jamb, except as otherwise indicated; weld prior to galvanizing of frame assembly. D. Products: 1. Interior Doors and Frames: Ingersoll Rand Steelcraft"L" Series with polystyrene core and "LW" edge options, or equal. 2. Exterior Doors and Frames: a. Single Flush Outswing Door With Mortised Lock Set: IR/Steelcraft "H-164Series" (Miami-Dade NOA 11-0921.11) b. Flush Outswing Door With Rim Exit Device: IR/Steelcraft "H Series" Double Flush Outswing Commercial Steel Doors w/SVR (Surface Vertical Rod) Panic Exit Devices (Miami-Dade NOA 12-0305.12; Core Option C, E orF; fully welded frame), or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 081113 - 8 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames. 1. For wrap-around frames,verify that completed openings are of correct size and thickness. 2. For butt type frames,verify that completed openings are of correct size. B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before proceeding with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance of the unit. 1. Install frames as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and DHI A115.1G. 2. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and NFPA 80,whichever is more restrictive. 3. Shim as indicated in DHI A115.1 and SDI 122. B. Grouting of Frames in Concrete/ Masonry Openings: 1. Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame. 2. Prior to installation, field coat the inside of frames with a Field-Applied Protective Coating to prevent electrolysis or corrosion. 3. Mix grout to provide 4-inch maximum slump consistency, and hand trowel into place. a. Do not use grout mixed to thinner"pumpable" consistency. 4. For additional information, refer to NAAMM/HMMA 820 TN01. C. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates. 1. Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth flush with adjacent surfaces-paint to match. D. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects. E. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. Provide final adjustment as follows: 1. Door Contact with Silencers: Doors shall strike a minimum of two silencers without binding lock or latch bolts in the strike plate. 2. Head, Strike, and Hinge Jamb Margin: 1/8 inch. 3. Meeting Edge Clearance, Pairs of Doors: +1/16 inch. 4. Bolts and Screws: Leave tight and firmly seated. 5. Sound seal gasketing. 081113 -9 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road 6. Vermin Protection: a. Drop Seal: Full contact with no gaps. b. Brush weatherstripping. F. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. G. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean condition. END OF SECTION 081113 - 10 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 5200 College Road SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 087100-Door Hardware. C. Section 088000-Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E413 --Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 2. ASTM E1408--Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door System). C. American Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) --Architectural Woodwork Standards. D. Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC). E. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (including 2012 Supplement). F. Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. (ITS): 1. ITS(DIR) -- Directory of Listed Products. G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80--Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. 2. NFPA 252--Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. UL(BMD) --Building Materials Directory. 2. UL 1013--Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. UL 1784--Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. WDMA I.S.1-A--Architectural Wood Flush Doors. J. Woodwork Institute (WI). 081415-1 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 - 2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. 1. Include product data for doors; finishing specifications and materials; and product data for glass and glazing materials. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Illustrate door opening criteria; glazing details; hardware types and locations, and hardware blocking requirements and location. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 3. Include certification program label. D. Specimen warranty. E. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for the following: 1. Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable. F. Samples: 1. Door Construction Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch(300 x 300 mm) in size cut from top corner of door. 2. Finish Selection Samples(for factory pre-finishing): a. Submit wood veneer color charts illustrating available range of wood grains, stain colors, and sheens, for selection of up to four initial finishes. b. Submit samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch (150 x 150 mm) in size illustrating Architect's four initial finish selections. c. Make adjustments in finish characteristics (e.g., wood grain, stain color, sheen)per Architect's request, and resubmit samples of for final finish selection. 3. Finish Verification Samples (for factory pre-finishing): Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. 081415-1 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. C. Installed Fire Rated Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. For additional warranty requirements, see Section 017800-Closeout Submittals. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Graham Wood Doors:www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Haley Brothers:www.haleybros.com. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc:www.marshfielddoors.com. 2.02 DOORS A. All Doors:. 1. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors:Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 715; UL or WH (ITS) labeled. a. Fire rated door assemblies required to have a minimum fire protection rating of20 minutes where located in corridor walls or smoke barrier walls having a fire-resistance rating in accordance with FBC-B TABLE 715.4 shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C without the hose stream test. 3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors: In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 081415-1 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road cfm per sq ft(0.01524 cu m/s/sq m) of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. (24.9 Pa) pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures; with "S" label; no additional gasketing or edge sealing allowed. a. Smoke and draft control doors complying with UL 1784 shall be labeled in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 715.4.6.1 and shall show the letter"S" on the fire rating label of the door. 4. Sound Retardant Doors: Minimum STC of 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,tested in accordance with ASTM E1408. 5. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors:Type structural composite lumber core (SCLC), plies and faces as indicated above. B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core,Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through- bolting. C. Sound Retardant Doors: Equivalent to Type PC construction with core as required to achieve rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Specie to be selected by Architect;veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet (3 m) of each other when doors are closed. B. Facing Adhesive:Type I -waterproof. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. B. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel,T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge. C. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel,T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors. 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other through-bolted hardware. 081415-1 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5- Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Satin. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 and UL requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct ,replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing,warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING 081415-1 5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE-See Drawings END OF SECTION 081415-1 6 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5200 College Road SECTION 084313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior aluminum-framed glazed storefronts. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 087100-Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. B. Section 088000-Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1. AAMA CW-10--Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. 2. AAMA 611--Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B221 --Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM B221M --Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct a pre-installation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 -2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000-Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners,glass and glazing, and door hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-1 5200 College Road E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided foreach door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. F. Samples: Submit two sample mullions 12 inches (300 mm) in length illustrating finished aluminum surface and glazing materials. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degreesC). Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. C. For additional warranty requirements, see Section 017800-Closeout Submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN --FRAMING FOR MONOLITHIC GLAZING A. Center-Set Style: 1. Basis of Design: CGI, Inc. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 1-3/4 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep (440 mm wide by 114 mm deep). B. Substitutions: See Section 016000- Product Requirements. 1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for substitutions. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I color anodized finish. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-2 5200 College Road a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fittedand secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 4. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F (95 degrees C)over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 5. Movement:Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 6. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections. 1. Glazing Stops: Flush. 2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings. 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000-Glazing. C. Swing Doors: Flush wood; refer to Section 081416-Flush Wood Doors. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (43 mm). 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Perimeter Sealant: Type specified in Section 079005 -Joint Sealers. D. Glazing Gaskets:Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. E. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 088000-Glazing. 2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm)thick. 1. Color: Black. C. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application. 2.07 HARDWARE A. For each door, include weatherstripping and threshold. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-3 5200 College Road B. Other Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished chrome. 2. For each door, include butt hinges, push handle, pull handle, exit device, and closer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions,tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. H. Set thresholds secure. I. Install hardware using templates provided. 1. For hardware installation requirements, see Section 087100-Door Hardware. J. Using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria, install glass in accordance with Section 088000-Glazing. K. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 079005 -Joint Sealers. L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft (1.5 mm/m) non-cumulative or1/16 inches per 10 ft(1.5 mm/3 m), whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch (0.8mm). ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-4 5200 College Road 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water,applied with soft, clean wiping cloths.Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 084313-5 5200 College Road SECTION 085700 ALUMINUM DOORS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Swing Doors: Impact-resistant aluminum swing doors,frames, side lites,transoms, and structural mullions, including aluminum extrusions, finish, glass, door hardware, water- barrier thresholds, and weather strips,for high velocity hurricane zone (HVHZ) construction. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry. B. Section 08 80 00-Glazing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 701/702: Pile weatherstripping and replaceable weatherseals. 2. AAMA 2603: Organic coatings on aluminum. 3. AAMA 2605: High-performance organic coatings on aluminum. B. American Society of Civil Engineers 1. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B 221: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM E 283: Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 3. ASTM E 330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E 331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. Florida Building Code, current edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building(Current edition). 2. FBC-TP-- Florida Building Code,Test Protocols for HVHZ. a. FBC-TP TAS-201 --Impact Test Procedures. b. FBC-TP TAS-202 --Criteria for Testing Impact and Nonimpact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure. c. FBC-TP TAS-203--Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind ALUMINUM DOORS 085700-1 1 5200 College Road Pressure Loading. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Impact-Resistant Aluminum Door Performance: 1. Structural Test:ASTM E 330. 2. Water Infiltration Resistance:ASTM ES47/E 331 and FBC TAS 202. 3. Air Infiltration Resistance: ASTM E 283. 4. Windborne Debris Impact Resistance: Pass large missile impact tests; Florida Building Code, FBC TAS 201. 5. Hurricane Wind Pressure Resistance: After passing large missile impact test, pass cyclic pressure tests following FBC TAS 203. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Refer to Section 013000-Administrative Requirements for complete submittal procedures. Indicate elevations, locations, markings, quantities, material, head jamb and sill conditions, metal thickness, sizes, shapes, dimensions,finishes and wind pressures. B. Product Data: Provide detailed data on Manufacturers catalog data on each product to be used, including Miami Dade County Product Approval (NOA). C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 10 years of experience in manufacturing impact-resistant aluminum windows and doors. B. Installer Qualifications: Skilled and experienced to install manufacturer's units of the types specified. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging in a clean, dry area until ready for installation. B. Protect exposed metal and glass surfaces to prevent damage to finish. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Warranty Period: Contact CGI Windows and Doors, Inc. for details on 10 year limited warranty. 1. Structural, Hardware and Certain Finishes: 10 years. 2. Stress Cracks on Glass: 1 year. 3. Delamination on Laminated Glass Units: 5 years. 4. Insulated Glass(sealed component): 10 years. ALUMINUM DOORS 085700-1 2 5200 College Road PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: CGI Windows and Doors, Inc. , 10100 N. W. 25th St. ; Miami, FL 33172;Toll Free Tel: 800-442-9042 ;Tel: 305-593-6590; Fax: 305-593-6592; Email:ocordova@cgiwindows.com; www.cgiwindows.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 2.2 SWING DOORS(SENTINEL) A. Swing Doors: Series 3550 Doors by CGI Windows and Doors, Inc. B. Swing Door Design: 1. Out-swing configuration. 2. 2 inches (51 mm) thick (nominal) door panels. 3. Complete frame,threshold and weatherstripping. 4. Extruded snap-on square glazing bead profile (contemporary). 5. Extruded astragal adaptor. 6. Muntins: Semi-contoured (exterior only) 1 inch (25 mm) double applied muntins. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Outswing Doors: Max. 3 ft x 8 ft panel. a. 100 psf Positive and Negative with annealed/annealed glass. b. 100 psf Positive and 110 psf Negative with heat strengthened glass. D. Air Infiltration Resistance: 1. Outswing Doors: No more than 0.07 cfm/sqft of glass area at static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf. E. Water Infiltration Resistance: 1. Outswing Doors: No water penetration at a static air pressure differential of 15 percent of positive design pressure with a maximum tested performance of 15 psf. F. Construction: Heavyweight extruded aluminum sections for wet glazing, precision cut and assembled with sealant filled hairline joints and no visible screws. Provide grooves in extrusions to receive 3 lines of weather stripping where doors abut frames. 1. Member Wall Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum; 0.150 inch (3.8 mm)at hardware mounting locations. 2. Member Sizes: Widths including glazing beads. a. Top Rails and Stiles: 1.918 inches (48.7 mm)thick by 5.5 inches (157mm). b. Bottom Rails: 1.918 inches(48.7 mm)thick by 8 inches (203 mm). ALUMINUM DOORS 085700-1 3 5200 College Road 3. Sightlines: a. Top Rails: 6.25 inches (15.88 cm). b. Jambs: 6.75 inches (17.146 cm). C. Sills: 8 inches (20.32 cm). 4. Door Corner Construction:Assemble using two 3/8 inch (8.9 mm) threaded compression rods in rails, secured at each end with washers and hex nuts. 5. Glazing Beads: Snap-in design, for interior wet glazing, 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) wall thickness,with at least 0.50 inch (12.7 mm) glass bite for impact-resistant glazing. 6. Finishes: Uniform at all visible surfaces exterior and interior. 7. Factory Glazing: a. Laminated Impact Resistant Glass Units: 7/16 inch (11 mm)thick (nominal) Saflex PVB laminated consisting of clear, non-yellowing, non-crazing interlayer sandwiched between two panes of glass 1) Outer And Inner Panes Of Laminated Unit: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). a) Type: Heat strengthened. b) Tint in Outer Panes: Green (Solexia). c) Interlayer: 0.090 inch/90 mil (2.2 mm)film. d) Interlayer Opacity: Clear-standard. e) Low E and high performance glass coatings as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 FINISHES A. AAMA 2605 Kynar Finish: Pretreatment plus 2 coat, 70 percent polyvinylidenefluoride (PVDF) coating, or manufacturer approved equal. 1. Color: As selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before start of unit installation, check openings for adequacy of pressure preservative treated wood blocking that will receive frames. Check the size, quantity, spacing, clearances, and rigidity of fastenings and their conformance to the specified NOA. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry 1. 3/4 inch (19 mm) or 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) as per specified NOA rectangular or beveled pressure preservative treated South Yellow Pine blocking, set in a full bed of sealant. 2. Fasten with to structure with drilled concrete fasteners spaced as required in NOA, so that blocking is continuous and is tightly butted to fill corners of each opening. B. Coordinate with Section 07 9126-Joint Fillers 1. Sealant at exterior perimeter of aluminum frames, in deeply grooved stucco or ALUMINUM DOORS 085700-4 5200 College Road in 1/4 inch (6 mm)gaps where other exterior finish materials terminate next to frames. 2. Sealant in 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap at frame interior perimeters where sills and interior finish materials such as gypsum board and tile terminate next to frames. C. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames,without damage to finish, as needed to fit project conditions and make watertight. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. 3.3 WINDOW INSTALLATION A. Install windows following manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter blocking at openings to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. Maintain integrity of air barriers and vapor retarder sheets. C. Align windows plumb and level, free of warp or twist. D. Adjust vents to close snugly and put in smooth operating order. 3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, requirements of NOA for hurricane and impact-resistant construction, and approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, requirements of governing NOA, and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact alkaline substrates such as concrete or mortar, and metals other than stainless steel or zinc, protect from direct contact by painting reactive substrate and dissimilar metals with a heavy coating of bituminous paint in the field. D. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door operation. E. Demonstrate doors and hardware are in good working order. 3.5 CLEANING A. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper cleaning and maintenance of the products. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM DOORS 085700-5 5200 College Road SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical and electrified door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL- Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL 1013 - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C- Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784-Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature C. ANSI -American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 -A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 -Standards for Hardware and Specialties. D. Florida Building Codes. E. Miami-Dade requirements for Hurricane (NOA)for exterior openings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, "EXAMINATION" article, herein. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 5200 College Road B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers'technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating: a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including: 1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. 2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers. 3. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work,within limitations of key coordination requirements. 4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and access control components). Operational description should include how door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire and smoke alarm connection. 1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 5. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 "Recommended Practices for Keying Systems" as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-2 5200 College Road d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. 6. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by manufacturer: a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. 3. Certificates of Compliance: a. Certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions if requested by Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. Installer Training Meeting Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of installer training meeting specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. c. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference Certification: Letter of compliance, signed by Contractor, attesting to completion of electrified hardware coordination conference, specified in "QUALITY ASSURANCE" article, herein. 4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency,for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. 5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representatives for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Final approved hardware schedule edited to reflect conditions as installed. f. Final keying schedule g. Copies of floor plans with keying nomenclature h. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. i. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-3 5200 College Road 1. Where specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by "No Substitute," including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.) a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for "No Substitute" govern product selection. B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly. C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and meets these requirements: 1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of electrified hardware with Architect and electrical engineers. E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. F. Exterior Openings Severe Windstorm Components testing: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, based on testing according to ANSI A250.13. Further compliance with Florida Building Codes for Hurricane (NOA)for Exterior Openings. G. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-4 5200 College Road H. Smoke-and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke-and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water. I. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. J. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf to release latch. Locks do not require use of key,tool, or special knowledge for operation. K. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in "REFERENCES" article, herein. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 Ibf. 2. Maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches from latch, measured to leading edge of door. L. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, and Supplier's Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. M. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. N. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2. Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference: Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-5 5200 College Road 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer's original packaging. C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent,cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. F. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail, overnight package service or hand delivery with signed receipt. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors,frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. F. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers: DOOR HARDWARE 087100-6 5200 College Road 1) Mechanical: 10 years. b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year. 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools: 1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to ensure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as "Scheduled Manufacturer" or "Acceptable Manufacturers" in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in "Acceptable Manufacturers" is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer's product. D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-7 5200 College Road 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. 2.3 HINGES A. Provide Five-knuckle, Ball Bearing hinges. 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Stanley FBB and CB Series. b. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ives 5BB series, McKinney TA series, Hager BB series. B. Requirements, unless otherwise specified: 1. 1-3/4" thick doors, up to and including 36 inches wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inch high. b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inch high. 2. 1-3/4" thick doors over 36 inches wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inch high. b. Interior: Heavyweight, steel, 5 inch high. 3. 2" or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inch high. b. Interior: Heavyweight, steel, 5 inch high. 4. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height. 5. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 6. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins. e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins. 7. Width of hinges: 4-1/2" at 1-3/4" thick doors, and 5" at 2" or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 8. Doors 36" wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2" high; doors greater than 36"wide furnish hinges 5" high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified. 9. Provide exterior hinges with additional corrosion resistant coating. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-8 5200 College Road 2.4 ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: ABH PT1000 and PT200 as specified. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Von Duprin, Securitron, Security Door Controls. B. Requirements: 1. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with number and gauge of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. 2. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer's template and UL requirements, unless interference with operation of door or other hardware items. 2.5 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer:Trimco 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Burns, Don-Jo, Ives, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12" steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches in height. For doors over 90 inches in height increase top rods by 12" for each additional 6" of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2.6 MORTISE LOCKS—GRADE 1, HEAVY DUTY A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers and Products: Best 45H Heavy Duty Mortise. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma M9000 Series, Sargent 8200 series, Schlage L9000 series. B. Mortise Type Locks and Latches: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Heavy Duty, Security Grade 2 and be UL10C. 2. Fit ANSI A115.1 door preparation. 3. 2-3/4" backset. 4. Solid, one-piece, 3/4"throw, anti-friction latchbolt made of self-lubricating stainless steel. 5. Deadbolt functions shall have 1"throw bolt made of hardened stainless steel. 6. Auxiliary deadlatch to be made of one-piece stainless steel, permanently lubricated. 7. Provide sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim. 8. Lever handles must be of forged or cast brass, bronze or stainless steel construction and conform to ANSI A117.1. Levers that contain a hollow cavity are not acceptable. 9. Lock shall have self-aligning, thru-bolted trim. 10. Mortise cylinders of lock shall have a concealed internal setscrew for securing the cylinder to the lockset.The internal setscrew will be accessible only by removing the core,with the control key, from the cylinder body. 11. Provide locksets with 7-pin removable and interchangeable core cylinders. 12. Core face must be the same finish as the lockset. 13. Functions as indicated in the hardware groups. 14. Lever Design: "14" Lever, "H" Rose and "J"Trim. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-9 5200 College Road 2.7 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS-GRADE 1, HEAVY DUTY A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers and Products: Best 9K Series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma C800 Series, Sargent 10 Line, Schlage ND series. B. Requirements: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade 1, Extra-Heavy Duty, and be UL10C listed. 2. Fit modified ANSI A115.2 door preparation. 3. Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to maintain complete lockset warranty. 4. Locksets to have anti-rotational studs that are thru-bolted. 5. Keyed lever shall not have exposed "keeper" hole. 6. Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it. 7. 2-3/4" backset. 8. 9/16"throw latchbolt. 9. Provide sufficient curved strike lip to protect door trim. 10. Outside lever sleeve to be seamless, of one-piece construction made of a hardened steel alloy. 11. Keyed lever to be removable only after core is removed, by authorized control key. 12. Provide locksets with 7-pin removable and interchangeable core cylinders. 13. Hub, side plate, shrouded rose, locking pin to be a one-piece casting with a shrouded locking lug. 14. Locksets outside locked lever must withstand minimum 1400-inch pounds of torque. In excess of that, a replaceable part will shear. Key from outside and inside lever will still operate lockset. 15. Core face must be the same finish as the lockset. 16. Functions as indicated in the hardware groups. 17. Lever Design: "14" Lever, "C" Rose 2.8 DEADBOLT LOCKS A. Cylindrical Deadbolt: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Scheduled Manufacturers and Products: Best T Series. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma D800, Sargent 480 Series, Schlage B series. 2. Requirements: a. Tested and approved by ANSI A156.5, Operational Grade 1. b. Fit modified ANSI A115.3 door preparation. c. Locksets and cores to be of the same manufacturer to maintain complete lockset warranty. d. 2-3/4" backset, or 2 3/8" backset as needed. e. 1" throw deadbolt. f. Provide locksets with 7-pin core. 2.9 EXIT DEVICES- HEAVY DUTY A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Precision Apex 2000 series. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma 9000 Series, Sargent 19-80 series, Von Duprin 98/35A series. B. Requirements: 1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to"KEYING' article, herein. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-10 5200 College Road 2. Exit Devices:Touchpad type, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware. 3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish or provide compatible finish. 4. Provide devices with dead latching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and other electrical requirements. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes. 6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. 7. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits. 8. Provide cylinder dogging at non-fire-rated exit devices. 9. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers. a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets. 10. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings. 11. Field drill weep holes per manufacturer's recommendation for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in the hardware sets. 12. Motorized latch retraction (MLR) to provide momentary and continuous remote latch retraction. MLR requires 24V @ 1 amp, holding current 250mA. UL listed for both panic and fire, shall be tested in compliance with UL 305, UL 10C and ANSI/BHMA 156.3, Grade 1. 13. Provide additional electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. 2.10 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Best Cormax. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma, Schlage, Sargent. B. Requirements: Provide cylinders/cores complying with the following requirements. 1. Cylinders/cores compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer's series as indicated. C. Full-sized cylinders with small format interchangeable cores(SFIC), in the below-listed co nfigu ratio n(s), distributed throughout the Project as indicated. 1. Keying: Manufacturer-keyed permanent cylinders/cores, configured into keying system per "KEYING" article herein. 2. Features: Cylinders/cores shall incorporate the following features. D. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication "Keying Systems and Nomenclature" for identification. Blind code marks shall not include actual key cuts. E. Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. F. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 1. Forward cylinders/cores to Owner, separately from keys, by means as directed by Owner. G. Project Cylinder/Core Distribution: Provide cylinders/cores complying with the following requirements in Project locations as indicated. H. Replaceable Construction Cores. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-11 5200 College Road 1. Provide temporary construction cores replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 12 operating keys for contractor use during construction. I. Permanent Keyed Cores: 1. Contractor to replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. Installation will be in presence of owner representative, indicating keys operate locking hardware and to turn over all permanent keys. 2.11 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Keying Requirements—General for Commercial 1. Permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. C. Key Features: Provide keys with the following features. 1. Patent Protection: Keys and blanks protected by a special broching in restricted keyway D. Keys 1. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of.107-inch (2.3mm) 2. Identification: Stamp all keys with keyset symbol 3. Quantity of keys: a. Provide (2) operating keys per keyed core. b. Provide (6) Master Keys. c. Provide (2) Control Keys E. Coordinate with cylinder/core and key identification requirements above. F. Stamp keys with Owner's unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer; key symbol and embossed or stamped with "DO NOT DUPLICATE". G. Failure to comply with stamping requirements shall be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. 2.12 DOOR CLOSERS—HEAVY DUTY A. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Stanley Commercial QDC100 series. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dorma 8900, Sargent 281 Series, LCN 4040 XP Series. B. Requirements: 1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 1. 2. UL10C certified. 3. Closer shall have extra-duty arms and knuckles. 4. Conform to ANSI 117.1. 5. Maximum 2 7/16" case projection with non-ferrous cover. 6. Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck. 7. Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required by frame and door conditions. 8. Full rack and pinion type closer with 1-1/2" minimum bore. 9. Mount closers on non-public side of door, unless otherwise noted in specification. 10. Closers shall be non-handed, non-sized and multi-sized. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-12 5200 College Road 2.13 COORDINATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer:Trimco 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: ABH, Burns, Don-Jo, Ives, Rockwood. B. Requirements: 1. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar-type coordinating device,surface applied to underside of stop at frame head. 2. Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device strikes. Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required. 2.14 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer:Trimco 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Don-Jo, Ives, Rockwood B. Requirements: 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 1/8 inch thick as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches high by 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs 2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers:ABH 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson, Rixson, Sargent B. Requirements: 1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors. 2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors. 3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard. 4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer. 2.16 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer:Trimco 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Don-Jo, Ives, Rockwood DOOR HARDWARE 087100-13 5200 College Road B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.17 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: National Guard 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pemko, Reese, Zero International B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2" high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2" high by 5" wide by door width 3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.18 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer:Trimco 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Don-Jo, Ives, Rockwood B. Requirements: 1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.19 QUICK CONNECT A. Quick Connect plug-in connectors: Quick connect plug-in must be used with a combination of the following components to work as a complete plug and play system. 1. Best locks series 45HW, 45HM, 8KW, 9KW, 9KM 2. To include Quick connectors to Best lock products Suffix "C" Example (45HW-7DEL14H DS C) 3. Precision Exit Devices 2000 Series, DE, DS,TS,TDS, LDS, ELR 4. To include Quick connectors to Precision Electric Exit device products Prefix"C" Example (C MLR 2108 x V4908A TS) 2.20 QUICK CONNECT WIRE HARNESSES A. Quick Connect Wire Harnesses:The Quick Connect wire harness shall have of one four wire connector and one eight wire connector.The four wire connector has two 18AWG and two 24AWG wires.The eight wire connector has eight 24AWG wires Stanley quick connect wire harnesses are available in various length's, 3" (76mm), 6" (152mm), 12" (304mm), 26" (660mm) 32" (812mm) 38" (965mm), 44" (1117mm), 50" (1270mm) and 192" (4876mm). 1. Wire Harness that is terminated at both ends is specified as WH-size (Example WH-3). DOOR HARDWARE 087100-14 5200 College Road 2. Wire Harness that is terminated at one end with exposed pin head at the other is specified as WH- size P (Example WH-313). 3. Wire Harness 6" (152mm)terminated at one end with bare leads on the other is specified as WH-6E. Notes The Wire harnesses with suffix"E" has bare wire ends, is used to connect the quick connect harness to a hardwired connection. Wire harnesses of different lengths may be combined to form a desired length The maximum size hole needed to pass through the quick connect plug is 1" (25MM). 2.21 KEY CONTROL CABINET A. Manufacturers: 1. Telkee, Lund, MMF. B. Key Control Cabinet: Provide one wall mounted key cabinet complete with hooks, index and tags to accommodate 50%expansion. Coordinate mounting location with architect. 2.22 FINISH A. Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware-3.7, and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMAA156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products B. Powder coat door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Gasketing to coordinate with frame color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction,wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect,tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners,when possible. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-15 5200 College Road 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. I. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. J. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. L. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. M. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. N. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. DOOR HARDWARE 087100-16 5200 College Road 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series,type and function. Refer to the above specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. Manufacturer List Code Name AB ABH Manufacturing Inc. BE Best Access Systems BY By Others DM Dorma Door Controls IV Ives NA National Guard PR Precision RC RCI SH Stanley Commercial Hardware ST Stanley TR Trimco DOOR HARDWARE 087100-17 5200 College Road Finish List Code Description AL Aluminum S1 Sprayed Aluminum Finish 26D Satin Chrome 32D Satin Stainless Steel 600 Primed for Painting 626 Satin Chromium Plated 630 Satin Stainless Steel 689 Aluminum Painted 630W Stainless Steel, Weatherized US28 Aluminum -Clear Anodized US26D Chromium Plated, Dull US32D Stainless Steel, Dull Option List Code Description C Quick Connect Wiring System R Full Size Rounded Plastic Cover HC Hurricane Code Device S1 ANSI - Deadbolt Strike S3 ANSI Strike Package SN Sex Nuts TS Touchbar Monitoring Switch WS Wind Storm Listed (Miami-Dade/Florida) 3RO Prefix option for 2000 Apex Series CSK Counter Sinking of Kick Plates MLR Motorized Latch Retraction RQE Request to Exit STK Standard Strike Package VIB Double Visual Indictor Option S300 Std. Strike- Rim and Top of SVR Devices SSMS/LA Stainless Machine Screws/Lead Anchor END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 087100-18 5200 College Road GLASS AND GLAZING SECTION 08800 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 08800 A. Glass and glazing for general and special purpose applications including; coated, float, heat- strengthened, impact resistant, insulating, low emissivity, laminated, spandrel and tempered glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 081416- Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 084313 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 --American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7--Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C864--Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 2. ASTM C920--Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3. ASTM C1036--Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 4. ASTM C1048--Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 5. ASTM C1172 --Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 6. ASTM C1193 --Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM C1376 --Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass. 8. ASTM E283 -- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen 08800- 1 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road 9. ASTM E331 --Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 10. ASTM E546--Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units 11. ASTM E547--Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. 12. ASTM E576--Standard Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in the Vertical Position 13. ASTM E1105--Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. 14. ASTM E1300--Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 15. ASTM E2190--Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. E. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building(including 2012 Supplement). 2. FBC-EC-- Florida Building Code, Energy Conservation (including 2012 Supplement). 3. FBC-TP-- Florida Building Code,Test Protocols for HVHZ. a. FBC-TP TAS-201-- Impact Test Procedures. b. FBC-TP TAS-202 --Criteria for Testing Impact and Nonimpact Resistan tBuilding Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure. c. FBC-TP TAS-203 --Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading. F. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1. GANA(GM) --GANA Glazing Manual. 2. GANA(SM) -- FGMA Sealant Manual. 3. GANA(LGDG) -- Laminated Glazing Reference Manual. G. Safety Glass Certification Council (SGCC). 1. SGCC (CPD) --Certified Products Directory. H. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): 1. SIGMA TM-3000--Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. I. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): 1. 16CFR1201--Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Glazing: 1. Design, materials, construction and quality of glass and glazing shall comply with criteria specified in the Contract Documents and applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTERS 15, 16 and 24 (including HVHZ provisions), and ASCE 7 CHAPTERS 26 through 31. a. Glass and glazing shall be designed and constructed to sufficiently resist the full pressurization from the wind loads prescribed in FBC-B CHAPTER 16 08800-2 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road (HVHZ) and the concentrated loads that result from hurricane-generated wind-borne debris. 2. Live Load Design Requirements: Refer to Section 081113 -Hollow Metal Door sand Frames and Section 085123 -Steel Windows and Doors. 3. Wind Load and Missile Impact Testing Requirements: Refer to Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames and Section 085123 -Steel Windows and Doors. 4. Glass Strength: Analysis shall comply with ASTM E1300. 5. Energy Conservation Requirements: Exterior glazing shall comply with the following: a. Comply with requirements of FBC-EC, except as follows: (1) Historic Property Exception:The existing building meets the requirements specified in FBC-EC SECTION 101.4.2 for designation as a historic property, and therefore is exempt from compliance with requirements of FBC-EC. b. U-factor: As determined by energy analysis simulation model. c. SHGC: As determined by energy analysis simulation model. B. Glass Design and Performance Requirements: 1. Safety Glazing: Except as otherwise indicated, all glazing shall be tested in accordance with 16CFR1201, and shall comply with the test criteria for Category II. a. Identification of Safety Glazing: Shall comply with applicable requirements of FBC-B SECTIONS 2406.3 and 2406.4. 2. Glazed Panel Safeguard: In glazed openings where safeguard is required per FBC-B SECTION 1618.4, laminated glass meeting the following requirements shall be provided. a. In addition to requirements for safety glazing, laminated glazing shall be tested by an accredited laboratory to satisfy the resistance requirements of FBC-B forwind, live and kinetic energy impact loading conditions. (1) Kinetic energy impact loading shall comply with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2411.4 and ANSI Z97.1 Class A. C. Structural Seal Design Requirements (Structural Glazing): 1. The design stress of the structural silicone shall not exceed 20 psi (138 kPa) for materials having a minimum strength of 100 psi (690 kPa) at the weakest element in the line of stress. 2. Such design stress shall also provide for a safety factor of not less than 5.0. 3. Safety factors greater than 5.0 shall be specified by the engineer when required or recommended by the manufacturer. 4. The silicone structural seal shall have a maximum modulus of elasticity to allow no more than 25 percent movement of the joint width at 20 psi(138 kPa)stress. 5. In insulating glass units, the secondary silicone seal shall be designed to with stand a minimum of one-half the design negative wind load applicable to the outboard lights. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 -2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000-Administrative Requirements. 2. Submittals required in this Section shall be coordinated with submittals required inRefer 08800-3 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road to Refer to Section 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames and Section 085123-Steel Windows and Doors, and submittals required by all shall be submitted concurrently. B. Product Data: 1. For each type of glass product to be used, provide complete product data including but not limited to structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 2. For each type of glazing compound to be used, provide complete product data including but not limited to chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. a. Identify available colors. 3. For each type of glazing accessory (e.g., setting blocks, spacers)to be used, provide manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. 4. Product Approvals: Refer to Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames and Section 085123 -Steel Windows and Doors C. Shop Drawings: Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the framing system indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity. Show details indicating glazing material,glazing thickness, bite on the glass and glassedge clearance. 1. Glass Supports: Where one or more sides of any pane of glass are not firmly supported, or are subjected to unusual load conditions, submit detailed shop drawings and analysis for the specific installation prepared by a qualified registered design professional. Coordinate with shop drawings required in related section(s). D. Samples: 1. Section Samples: a. Color Charts: (1) Preformed glazing materials. (2) Glazing sealants. (3) PVB Interlayer(for laminated glass assemblies). 2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size of the following types of glass to be used: a. Laminated glass assemblies. b. Insulated glass unit assemblies. E. Pre-construction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: Submit glazing sealant manufacturer's test report indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates, and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. F. Reports: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units. 2. Glass Fabricator's Shop Drawing Review Reports: Submit Glass Fabricator's Shop Drawing Review indicating compliance with glazing standards established by GANA. a. Submittal to include thermal stress and structural load analysis of the proposed glass types, configuration and sizes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 08800-4 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA(GM), GANA(SM), GANA(LGDG),SIGMA TM- 3000, and applicable Product Approval. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer. C. Labels: Comply with labeling requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1523, 1703, 1715, 2403 and 2406. D. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. For each type of glass to be used, provide the following: a. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance indicating that the product meets or exceeds applicable Glass Design and Performance Requirements. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance indicating shading coefficient. c. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance indicating "R" value (when value is specified). E. Glass of each type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling ofcrates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage. B. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry. C. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field-measured products. B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F(10 degrees C). C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. D. All glass panels used in each type of glazing application (e.g., curtain wall, storefront,etc.) shall be of the same thickness; minimum thickness shall meet specified performance requirements. 1.09 WARRANTIES A. Tempered Glass Warranty: Provide a written warranty including coverage against manufacturing defects for a period of not less than five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Defects include but are not limited to failure due to spontaneous breakage (e.g., breakage as a result of Nickel Sulfide (NiS) inclusions) at a rate exceeding 0.5 percent (5/1000) during the warranty period. B. Coated Glass Warranty: Provide a written warranty including coverage against manufacturing defects for a period of not less than ten (10)years from date of 08800-5 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road Substantial Completion. 1. Defects include but are not limited to peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. C. Laminated Glass Warranty: Provide a written warranty including coverage against manufacturing defects for a period of not less than five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Defects include but are not limited to edge separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standards. D. Insulating Glass Warranty: Provide a written warranty including coverage against manufacturing defects for a period of not less than ten (10)years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Defects include but are not limited to failure of the hermetic seal. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture or film on interior surfaces of glass. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturers/Fabricators: 1. Float Glass: a. Basis of Design: PPG Industries, Inc.: www.ppgideascapes.com. b. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract requirements (including but not limited to Product Approval), equivalent products by one of the following may be used: (1) AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. (2) Guardian Industries: www.sunguardglass.com. (3) Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. (4) Viracon,Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 2. Laminated Glass: a. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. b. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. c. Viracon,Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com 3. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Any fabricator certified by glass manufacturer for type of glass, coating, and treatment involved and capable of providing specified warranty. 4. Glazing Sealant: a. Dow Corning: www.dowcorning.com. b. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 5. Obtain glass and glazing materials from one source for each product indicated. Coatings and finished assemblies, such as insulating units and laminated units,tobe manufactured by the same fabricator in order to have a common source of warranty. B. Identification and Labeling Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1703.5 and 2406.3 and the following: 1. Each pane of glass shall bear the manufacturer's mark designating the type and 08800-6 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road thickness of the glass or glazing material. a. With the exception of tempered glazing materials or laminated materials, the identification shall not be omitted unless approved and an affidavit is furnished by the glazing contractor certifying that each light is glazed in accordance with approved construction documents that comply with the provisions of FBC-B CHAPTER 2403. b. Safety glazing shall be identified in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 2406.3. 2. Each pane of tempered glass (except tempered spandrel glass)shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer shall be permanently identified with the laminator, overall glass thickness and trade name of the interlayer. a. The identification mark shall be acid etched, sand blasted, ceramic fired, laser etched, embossed or of a type that, once applied, cannot be removed without being destroyed. 3. Each pane of laminated glass (except laminated spandrel glass) shall be permanently identified with the laminator, overall glass thickness and trade name of the interlayer. a. The identification mark shall be acid etched, sand blasted, ceramic fired, laser etched, embossed or of a type that, once applied, cannot be removed without being destroyed. 4. Each pane of tempered or laminated spandrel glass shall be provided with a removable paper marking by the manufacturer. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. General: 1. All glass shall float glass complying with ASTM C1036 requirements. 2. Heat-strengthened and tempered glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, and tempered glass shall comply with 16 CFR 1201. 3. Transparent and obscure safety glazing shall conform to ANSI Z97.1. 4. Installed glass shall not be less than Single-Strength B quality, and where edges are exposed they shall be seamed or ground. 5. Swinging or sliding doors of glass without a continuous frame shall be of only fully tempered glass not less than 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) in thickness. 6. The glazing in fixed panels adjacent to paths of egress shall comply with DESIGNAND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS in this Section. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036,Type I (transparent flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted), as applicable. 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048,Type I (transparent flat), Quality q3 (glazing select). a. Use horizontal tempering to eliminate tong marks, and install temper direction parallel to floor to minimize visual distortion effect. C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, Kind LA(laminated),fabricated from two pieces offloat glass laminated together with a clear polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer. 1. Laminated glass shall comply with Glass Design and Performance Requirements for Safety Glazing, Glazed Panel Safeguard, and Glass in Elevator Hoistways. 2. Fabricate in autoclave with heat, plus pressure, free of foreign substances and air pockets. 3. Where fully tempered glass is indicated or required, provide glass that has been 08800-7 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road tempered by the tong-less horizontal method. D. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: 1. Sealed Insulating Glass Units shall comply with Glass Design and Performance Requirements for Safety Glazing, Glazed Panel Safeguard, and Energy Conservation. 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTME2190. 3. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer,with supplementary silicone sealant. 5. Interpane Space: Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 2.03 HEAT STRENGTHENED GLASS A. General: 1. Use horizontal tempering to eliminate tong marks, and install temper direction parallel to floor to minimize visual distortion effect. B. Glass Type 1CHS-Clear Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS, Condition A,Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). C. Glass Type 1THS-Tinted Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS, Condition A,Type I, Class 2, Quality q3. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Tint Color: Emerald green a. Product: "Atlantica" by PPG, or equal. 2.04 FULLYTEMPERED GLASS A. General: 1. Use horizontal tempering to eliminate tong marks, and install temper direction parallel to floor to minimize visual distortion effect. B. Glass Type 1CFT-Clear Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A,Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 1. Thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch), unless otherwise indicated. C. Glass Type 1TFT-Tinted Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A,Type I, Class 2, Quality q3. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). 2. Tint Color: Emerald green a. Product: "Atlantica" by PPG, or equal. 2.05 LOW-E COATED GLASS A. General: 1. Low Emissivity(Low-E) Coatings:Triple-silver, Magnetic Sputter Vacuum Deposition (MSVD)glass coating designed to provide the best combination of visible light transmittance and solar control,together with clear glass appearance. (1) Product: "Solarban 70XL" by PPG, or equal. B. Glass Type 1CHS(E) -Clear Heat-Strengthened Glass with Low-E Coating: GlassType 1CHS,with Low-E Coating on one surface. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). 08800- 8 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road C. Glass Type 1THS(E)-Tinted Heat-Strengthened Glass with Low-E Coating: Glass Type 1THS, with Low-E Coating on one surface. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). D. Glass Type 1CFT(E) -Clear Fully Tempered Glass with Low-E Coating: Glass Type1CFT, with Low-E Coating on one surface. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). E. Glass Type 1TFT(E) -Tinted Fully Tempered Glass with Low-E Coating: Glass Type1TFT, with Low-E Coating on one surface. 1. Thickness: Thickness as indicated; or if not indicated, provide 6 mm (1/4 inch). 2.06 LAMINATED GLASS ASSEMBLIES A. Fabrication: 1. Laminated Glass assemblies shall meet or exceed requirements of ANSI Z97.1Class A and 16CFR1201 Cat II. 2. Laminated Glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure. B. Exterior Laminated Glass Assemblies: 1. Glass Type 2C-Clear Laminated Safety Glass: 9/16 inch thick(nominal) clear laminated glass assembly comprised of the following: a. Inner Ply: Glass Type 1CHS. (1) Thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch), except as otherwise indicated shall comply with Product Approval. b. Interlayer: ASTM C1172, clear, heat and light stable, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plasticized resin sheeting. c. Outer Ply: Glass Type 1CHS. (1) Thickness: Same as Inner Ply. 2. Glass Type 2T(E) -Tinted Laminated Safety Glass w/ Low-E: 7/16 inch thick(nominal) tinted laminated glass assembly comprised of the following: a. Inner Ply: Glass Type 1CHS(E). (1) Thickness: 5 mm (3/16 inch), except as otherwise indicated; shall comply with Product Approval. b. Interlayer: ASTM C1172, clear, heat and light stable, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plasticized resin sheeting. (1) Thickness: 0.090 inch, except as otherwise indicated; shall comply with Product Approval. c. Outer Ply: Glass Type 1THS(E). (1) Thickness: Same as Inner Ply. d. When incorporated in an IGU, the Low-E coating shall be on No.4 surface. C. Interior Laminated Glass Assemblies: 1. Glass Type 2C(1) -Clear Laminated Safety Glass: a. Inner Ply: Glass Type 1CFT. b. Interlayer: ASTM C1172, clear, heat and light stable, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plasticized resin sheeting; 0.030 inch thickness. c. Outer Ply: Glass Type: 1CFT 08800-9 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road 2.07 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNIT(IGU)ASSEMBLIES A. Fabrication: 1. Units shall be certified by the IGCC for compliance with ASTM E2190. 2. Overall Thickness Tolerance:The unit overall thickness tolerance shall be -1/16inch (1.59mm)/+1/32 inch (0.79mm), except as follows: a. Unit constructed with patterned or laminated glass shall be+/-1/16 inch (1.59mm). 3. Units shall comply with ASTM E546 and ASTM E576. 4. Units shall be double sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutylene and a secondary seal of silicone. a. The minimum thickness of the secondary seal shall be 1/16 inch (1.59mm). b. The target width of the primary seal shall be 5/32 inch (3.97mm). c. There shall be no voids or skips in the primary seal. d. Up to a maximum of 3/32 inch of the air spacer may be visible above the primary polyisobutylene sealant. e. Gaps or skips between primary and secondary sealant are permitted to a maximum width of 1/16 inch (1.59mm) by maximum length of 2 inches(51mm) with gaps separated by at least 18 inches (457mm). Continuous contact between the primary seal and the secondary seal is required. B. To provide a hermetically sealed and dehydrated space, lites shall be separated by an aluminum spacer with three bent corners and one keyed-soldered corner or four bent corners and one straight butyl injected zinc plated steel straight key joint. Glass Type IGU-1 -Tinted Insulated Glass Unit w/ Low-E: 1. Description: 1-1/4 inch (nominal) overall thickness IGU assembly comprised of the following: a. Inner Layer: Glass Type 1CFT; 1/4 inch (nominal)thickness. b. Air Space: 1/2 inch air space, with aluminum spacer. c. Outer Layer: Glass Type 2T(E); 7/16 inch (nominal)thickness d. Low-E coating on No.4 surface. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGQ 0.24. b. Shading Coefficient: 0.28. c. Visible Light Transmittance: 49.3 percent. d. U-Value: (1) Winter, Night-time: 0.28. (2) Summer, Day-time: 0.26. e. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): 2.04. 2.08 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND ACCESSORIES A. As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service. B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot(25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm)x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)x height 08800- 10 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. C. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. D. Sea IingTape: 1. Semi-solid polymeric based material exhibiting pressure-sensitive adhesion and withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging. 2. Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing application to prevent water infiltration. E. Edge Protection Tape for Laminated Glass: "Scotch Brand Cellopane Tape", manufactured by 3M Company. F. Spring Steel Spacer: Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in channel or rabbeted sash with stops. G. Glazing Clips: Galvanized steel spring wire designed to hold glass in position in rabbeted sash without stops. H. Glazing Springs and Points: Pure zinc stock, thin, flat, triangular or diamond shaped pieces, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum size. I. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864; compression gaskets, closed cell, neoprene, EPDM or silicone rubber composition designed to provide a water-resistant seal between glass and frame; color to be selected by Architect. 1. Firm dense wedge shape for locking in sash. 2. Soft, closed cell with locking key for sash key. 3. Flanges may terminate above the glazing-beads or terminate flush with top of beads. J. Glazing Sealants: 1. Structural Silicone Sealant:ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, M, G,A and O, non-staining, non-bleeding, silicone sealant meeting requirements of Product Approval; color to be selected by Architect. 2. Backer Rod: Dow Corning Ethafoam SB polyethelene cord or butyl rubber foamcord. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that openings for glass and glazing units are of proper size; plumb; square; and level before installation is started. 2. Verify that glazing openings conform to details, dimensions and tolerances indicated on manufacturer's approved shop drawings. B. Advise Contractor of conditions that may adversely affect glass and glazing unit installation, prior to commencement of installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Verify that wash down of adjacent wall construction (e.g., tilt-up precast concrete) is 08800- 11 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road completed prior to erection of glass and glazing units, to prevent damage to glass and glazing units by cleaning materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA(GM), GANA(SM), IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA(SM). B. Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to receive the glazing. C. Shop-fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings to provide GANA recommended edge clearances. D. Verify that components used are compatible. E. Clean and dry glazing surfaces. F. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by pre-construction sealant- substrate testing. G. Leave labels in place until the installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat- absorbing glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. H. Securely fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing compound has thoroughly set. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install in accordance with GANA(GM)and GANA(SM), unless specified otherwise. B. Glass Cutting: Make cuts clean, only moderately convoluted,with flare or bevel not exceeding 1/8 of glass thickness. 1. Unacceptable defects: a. Impact chips, spalls, or nipped edges. b. Flake chips or shark teeth deeper than 1/4 of glass thickness. c. Serration hackle deeper than 1/8 of glass thickness. C. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass tempered or heat strengthened. D. Remove and replace glass broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction. E. Glaze in accordance with recommendations of glazing and framing manufacturers, and as required to meet the Performance Test Requirements specified in other applicable sections of specifications. F. Set glazing without bending, twisting, or forcing of units. G. Do not allow glass to rest on or contact any framing member. H. Glaze doors until sealant,glazing compound, or putty has thoroughly set. I. Tempered Glass: Install with roller distortions in horizontal position unless otherwise 08800- 12 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road directed. J. Plastic: 1. Use dry glazing method. 2. Use only neoprene or EPDM gaskets. K. Laminated Glass: 1. Tape edges to seal interlayer and protect from glazing sealants. 2. Do not use putty or glazing compounds. 3.04 GLASS SETTING A. Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and thickness specified or indicated. B. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the GANA(GM), GANA(SM), SIGMA TM-3000, manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: 1. Glazing methods used for exterior windows, storefronts and storefront entrance doors must conform to applicable Product Approval requirements and installation instructions. C. Handle and install glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Use beads or stops which are furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in place. E. Verify products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted. F. Sheet Glass: Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal. G. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: 1. Do not grind, nip, or cut edges or corners of units after the units have left the factory. 2. Springing,forcing, or twisting of units during setting will not be permitted. 3. Handle units so as not to strike frames or other objects. 4. Installation shall conform to applicable recommendations of IGMATM-3000. 3.05 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING A. Glass units which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged during construction activities, and glass which has been installed improperly shall be removedand replaced with new units. B. Remove temporary labels, paint spots, and defacement. C. After glass has been inspected and approved, remove labels and wash and polish glass on both faces before the Board's approval of the project. 1. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished surfaces from damage during erection, and after completion of work. Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable. 08800- 13 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road 3.07 GLASS&GLAZING SCHEDULE A. Exterior: 1. Vision Lite and Glazing in Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames): Glass Type IGU-2, conforming to window assembly Product Approval. 2. Glazing in Steel Windows (Section 085123 -Steel Windows): Glass Type IGU-1, conforming to window assembly Product Approval. 3. Glazing in Steel Doors (Section 085124-Steel Doors): Glass Type IGU-1, conforming to window assembly Product Approval. B. Interior: 1. Vision Lite in Hollow Metal Doors (Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames): Glass Type ; shop-glaze per door manufacturer's standard. 2. Glazing in Hollow Metal Frames (Section 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames): Glass Type ; field glaze per demountable partition system manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Vision Lite in Wood Doors (Section 081416- Flush Wood Doors): Glass Type1CFT; shop-glaze per door manufacturer's standard. 4. Glazing in Aluminum Framed Storefronts (Section 084313 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts): Glass Type 1CFT; field glaze per demountable partition system manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Glazing in Service/Teller Window (Section 085659 -Service and Teller Window Units): Glass Type 1CFT; shop-glaze per door manufacturer's standard. END OF SECTION 08800- 14 GLASS AND GLAZING 5200 College Road SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-structural metal framing. B. Gypsum board. C. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 042000—Concrete Unit Masonry B. Section 061000- Rough Carpentry. C. Section 072100 -Thermal Insulation. D. Section 093013 -Tiling. E. Section 099000- Painting and Coating: Field application of paint on: 1. Exposed surfaces of work included in this Section, including but not limited to gypsum board wall, ceiling, soffit and bulkhead assemblies. 2. Concealed surfaces of fire-rated gypsum board assemblies, per requirements of specified UL Design Assembly. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards, see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. AISI SG02-1 -- North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed SteelStructural Members; 2001 with 2004 supplement (replaced AISI SG-971). 2. AISI S200-- North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General 092116-1 1 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road Provisions. 3. AISI 5202 --Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.11 --American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 2. ANSI A118.9 --American National Standard Specifications for CementitiousBacker Units. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A525 --Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A641 --Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon SteelWire. 3. ASTM A653/A653M --Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C36/C36M --Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. (Withdrawn;Replaced by ASTM C1396/C1396M-11). 5. ASTM C423 --Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 6. ASTM C442--Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board. 7. ASTM C473 --Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. 8. ASTM C475/C475M --Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tapefor Finishing Gypsum Board. 9. ASTM C645 --Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 10. ASTM C665 --Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 11. ASTM C754 --Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Membersto Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 12. ASTM C834--Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. 13. ASTM C840 --Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 14. ASTM C919 --Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 15. ASTM C954 --Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. 16. ASTM C1002--Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws forthe Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. 17. ASTM C1047--Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboardand Gypsum Veneer Base. 18. ASTM C1278/C1278M --Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel. 19. ASTM C1325--Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat ReinforceclCement Substrate Sheets. 092116-1 2 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 20. ASTM C1395 --(Refer to ASTM C1396/C1396M). 21. ASTM C1396/C1396M --Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 22. ASTM D638--Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 23. ASTM D790--Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 24. ASTM D3273 --Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on theSurface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 25. ASTM D3678--Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Interior- Profile Extrusions. 26. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics ofBuilding Materials. 27. ASTM E90--Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of AirborneSound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 28. ASTM E119 --Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 29. ASTM E413 --Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. E. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (including 2012 Supplement). F. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-214-- Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA-216 --Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 3. GA-226 --Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces. 4. GA-600-- Fire Resistance Design Manual. G. International Code Council, Inc. (ICC): 1. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES): a. ICC-ES AC38 --Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers. H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 251 --Standard Methods of Test of Fire Endurance Building Constructionand Materials. I. Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA): 1. SFIA(TG) --Technical Guide for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Products. J. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA): 1. SSMA(PTI) -- Product Technical Information. K. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20--Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"). L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL(FRD) -- Fire Resistance Directory. 2. UL 263 -- Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1.04 SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and install systems as indicated but not less than that required to comply with 092116-1 3 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road applicable requirements of the governing building code and ASTM C754. 1. In addition, fire-resistance rated assemblies shall conform to requirements of the applicable UL Design as described in the UL(FRD). B. Fabricate and install framing assemblies and components of sufficient strength to support the loads and forces encountered, or combinations thereof, without exceeding inany of its structural elements the stresses prescribed the governing building code and referenced standards. 1. Live Loads and Deflection Requirements: a. Stud Framing Assemblies for Interior Partitions: Shall be designed, fabricatedand installed to resist all loads to which they are subjected, but not less than uniform live load of 5 PSF (240 Pa) applied perpendicular to the wall. (1) Deflection of stud framing members at this load shall not exceed L/240; except where partition is to be sheathed with plaster or tile wall finish, deflection at this load shall not exceed L/360. b. Interior Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Shall be designed, fabricated and installed to resist all loads to which they are subjected, but not less than uniform live load of 5 PSF(240 Pa)applied perpendicular to the ceiling/soffit. (1) Deflection of suspended ceiling or soffit framing members at this loadshall not exceed L/360 of distance between supports. 2. Limiting height/span for studs is to be calculated using specified uniform live load(as specified) perpendicular to studs, based on studs alone; the use of composite action with collateral materials (e.g., gypsum wall board) may not be used to achieve minimum requirements. Stress calculations are to be based on capacity ofstuds alone. 3. Maximum end bearing reaction load shall be calculated with minimum safety factorof 3. C. Fire Resistance Ratings:Where fire resistance classification is indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to that listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200-General Conditions (AIA A201 - 2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000- Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Submit properly identified product data for each product specified, including materials specifications, installation recommendations, and other data as may be required to show compliance with specifications. a. For each type of framing and furring system, provide data describing materialsand finish, product criteria, charts and tables, and limitations. (1) Limiting Wall Height Charts and Tables for Steel Stud Partition Framing Systems per SFIA(TG) or SSMA(PTI). Indicate stud selections for eachstud framing condition, and coordinate with shop drawings. (a) Where height of partition is greater than heights in Charts and Tables, provide engineering design by a qualified Florida-registered engineer, 092116-1 4 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road and submit design calculations. (2) Limiting Span Charts and Tables for Steel Stud Ceiling Systems per SFIA(TG) or SSMA(PTI). Indicate stud selections for each ceiling framing condition, and coordinate with shop drawings. (a) Where framing system with span greater than 8 feet is proposed, provide engineering design by a qualified Florida-registered engineer,and submit design calculations. (3) Limiting Span Charts and Tables for Suspended Ceiling Grillage Systems.Indicate furring and channel selections for each ceiling framing condition,and coordinate with shop drawings. b. For each type of gypsum board, accessories,joint finishing system, and otherboard materials, provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with requirements. c. For each type of acoustical insulation and other sound attenuation materials, provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with requirements. d. For each type of head-of-partition system, provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with requirements. e. For each type of anchor plate and backer plate, provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with requirements. f. Provide product data for screws and fasteners. (1) Power-Actuated Fasteners: Include allowable loads, embedment, and spacing criteria. 2. For each type of partition assembly, provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with specified acoustic attenuation and fire resistance rating performance requirements. 3. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 4. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Rated assemblies to be substantiated from applicable testing using proposed products, by Contractor. a. Both metal framing and wallboard manufacturers must submit written confirmation that they accept the other manufacturer's product as a suitable component in the assembly. Acceptance is as follows: (1) If installation of both products is proper, no adverse effect will result inthe performance of one manufacturer's product by the other's product. (2) Combining products can be substantiated by required assembly tests. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate prefabricated work, component details, stud layout,framed openings, anchorage to structure, acoustic details,type and location of fasteners, accessories,and items of other related work. 2. Describe method for securing tracks to building structure, and studs to tracks, andfor blocking and reinforcement of framing connections. a. Include allowable shear and tension load limits for fasteners and anchors, and calculations showing that they can meet applicable SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. 092116-1 5 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 3. For each stud framing condition, identify framing member properties using four- part member identification codes per industry standard nomenclature published inAISI S200 (e.g., 362S125-33) and material yield strength (e.g., Fy=33 ksi). 4. For steel stud ceiling and soffit framing conditions where proposed framing member span exceeds 8 feet, include shop drawings and engineering calculations signed and sealed by a qualified structural engineer licensed in the State of Florida. 5. For steel stud ceiling and soffit framing conditions where framing members are suspended from building structure above, include shop drawings and engineering calculations signed and sealed by a qualified structural engineer licensed in the State of Florida. 6. Indicate related work specified in other sections, including but not limited to concealed anchor plates, metal fabrications, backing for wall-mounted items (e.g.,cabinets,toilet compartments, surface-mounted toilet accessories, grab bars, or other surface- mounted fittings and accessories) to be attached to stud-framed or furred walls/partitions. 7. Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustic seals, and draftstopping, fireblocking and firestopping. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. LEED Submittals: None. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Metal Framing Materials Manufacturer: Shall be a firm or company that is currently a full member of the SSMA or SFIA. 2. Gypsum Board Materials Manufacturer: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment material from a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Sectionwith minimum five years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer. C. Mock-Up: Provide mock-up of stud wall, ceiling, and soffit assemblies including finishspecified in other sections. Coordinate with installation of associated work specified in other sections. 1. Mock-up Size: Full height, minimum 12 feet (3.5 m) long, including corner. 2. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. D. Contractor shall provide full time quality control over all fabrication and erection toensure compliance with applicable requirements of the governing building code and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction. 1. Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 092116-1 6 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 1. Deliver materials to site promptly without undue exposure to weather. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identifiedwith name, brand,type and grade. B. Storage: 1. Store materials above ground in dry, ventilated space. 2. Protect materials from soiling, rusting and damage. 3. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling in accordance with AISI S202. C. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installation. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Proceed with installation of gypsum board materials only after building is weathertight. a. Maintain temperature in areas receiving gypsum board materials between 55 degrees and 90 degrees F. during and after installation and provide adequate ventilation. 2. For finishing of gypsum board, maintain ambient temperature above 55 degrees Ffrom one week prior to joint treatment, and until joint treatment is complete and dry. B. Coordinate the placement of components to be installed within stud framing system. C. Coordinate layout and installation of suspension system components for suspended ceilings with other work supported by or penetrating through ceiling. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing Materials: 1. Allsteel &Gypsum Products Inc.: www.allsteelproducts.com. 2. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems, LLC:www.clarkdietrich.com. 3. Marino-Ware: www.marinoware.com. 4. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com. 5. Radius Track Corporation: www.radiustrack.com. 6. The Steel Network Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. 7. Telling Industries, LLC: www.tellingindustries.com. B. Board Materials: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum Corporation (G-P): ww.gp.com. 2. National Gypsum Company(NGC): www.nationalgypsum.com. 3. United States Gypsum Company(USG): www.usg.com. a. Local Representative:Jennifer Kelly;Tel. 305-609-5455. C. Drywall Beads and Trim: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (Amico): www.amico-online.com. 2. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems, LLC:www.clarkdietrich.com. 3. Plastic Components, Inc. (PCI): www.plasticomponents.com. 092116-1 7 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 4. United States Gypsum Company(USG): www.usg.com. a. Local Representative:Jennifer Kelly;Tel. 305-609-5455. 5. Vinyl Corporation: www.vinylcorp.com. D. Anchorage Devices (for attaching metal framing components to concrete): 1. Hilti North America: www.hhilti.com. 2. ITW Ramset: www.ramset.com. 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Steel Studs, Ceiling Supports and Track Runners: Framing assemblies and componentsof sufficient strength to support the loads and forces encountered, or combinations thereof, without exceeding in any of its structural elements the stresses prescribed the governing building code and referenced standards. 1. Structural properties of studs and runners shall comply with ASTM C645. 2. The unsupported height of partitions shall comply with the loads and deflections setforth in SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS and FBC- B CHAPTER 16(HVHZ). 3. Steel ceiling supports shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2514.5. 4. Steel studs, track runners and ceiling supports in walls shall comply with ASTMA525. C. Acoustic Attenuation:Where sound rating is indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to those tested by manufacturer to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on testsconducted in accordance with ASTM E90. D. Fire/Smoke Rated Assemblies: Comply with applicable requirements of the governingbuilding code including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 7, and as indicated on drawings. 1. Where fire resistance classifications are indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to those listed by UL or tested according to ASTME119 for type of construction indicated. 2.03 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Metal framing materials shall conform to FBC-B SECTIONS 2506, 2508,2509, 2514, 2517 and 2518. 1. Ceiling Hangers:Type and size as specified in FBC-B SECTION 2514.5 ancIASTM C754 for spacing required. B. Metal Studs and Runners: ASTM C645, G60 galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing as specified in SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Studs: Extra-Duty, C-shaped steel studs. a. Depth (flange): 1-1/4 inches (35 mm) minimum, except as follows: 092116-1 8 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road (1) Where stud depth greater than 1-1/4 inches is required per UL Design assembly referenced on Drawings, provide studs of depth specified in theUL (FRD) assembly description for the referenced UL Design assembly. b. Return: Provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum folded back return flange leg ateach side of stud, except as follows: (1) Stud Size 2-1/2 Inches Wide or Smaller: Return is not required. c. Size (width): 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), 3-5/8 inches (92mm),4 inches (102 mm), or 6 inches (152 mm), as indicated on Drawings. d. Thickness (gage): As required to meet or exceed most stringent requirementsas specified in SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load, deflection) and FBC-B CHAPTER 25, except as follows: (1) Where Thickness Is Indicated on Drawings: Minimum thickness to be notless than gage indicated on Drawings. (2) Where Framing is to Receive Cementitious Backer Board: Minimum thickness to be not less than 20 gage (33 mils). (3) Where Framing is to Support Wall-Mounted Cabinets or Equipment: Minimum thickness to be not less than 20 gage (33 mils). e. Yield Strength (Fy): As required to meet or exceed most stringent requirements specified in SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load, deflection)and FBC-B CHAPTER 25,exceptas follows: (1) Minimum yield strength be not less than 33 ksi. 2. Runners/Tracks: U-shaped, sized to match studs. a. Size (width): Sized to match studs. b. Depth: Leg height to be not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). (1) Where greater track depth is required per UL Design Assembly referencedon drawings, provide tracks of depth specified in the UL(FRD) assembly description for the referenced UL Design Assembly. c. Metal Thickness (gage): Same as studs. 3. Slotted Deflection Tracks (Partition Head-to-Structure Connections): Provide U-shaped channel with mechanical anchorage devices designed to accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. a. Structural Performance: (1) Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity requiredby applicable requirements of the governing building code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI SG02-1. (2) Allow for vertical deflection of structure of up to 1 inch (1/2 inch up andl/2 inch down), except as otherwise indicated. b. Fire-Resistance: Provide components certified for use in UL-listed fire-ratedhead of partition joint systems of fire rating and movement required. c. Material: ASTM A653 steel sheet, SS Grade 50,with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. (1) Thickness: 18 or 20 gauge, as required to comply with manufacturer's published Allowable Lateral Loads criteria; but in no instance shall 092116-1 9 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road thickness be less than 20 gauge. d. Dimensions: (1) Size (width): Sized to match studs. (2) Depth (flange): Leg height to be not less than 2-1/2 inches; with verticalslots 1/4 inch wide x 1-1/2 inches long, spaced at 1 inch o.c. e. Acceptable Products: MAXTRAK SLOTTED DEFELCTION TRACK or BRADY'S SLP- TRK SLOTTED DEFELCTION TRACK by ClarkwesternDietrich, or equal. 4. Radius Runners (for curved wall framing): Manufactured, hand-bendable, U-shaped runner specifically designed for use in curved drywall assemblies; shallholds its shape once formed. a. Minimum Bend Radius Capability: 20 inches. b. Material: ASTM A653 steel sheet, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. c. Size (width): Sized to match studs. d. Metal Thickness (gage): 20 gage (33 mils). e. Product: READY-TRACK by RadiusTrack, or equal. C. Furring Systems: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessaryto comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. 1. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm). a. Size (width): 7/8 inch (22 mm) or 1-1/2 inches(38 mm), as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 7/8 inch (22 mm). b. Metal Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, as indicated on drawings, exceptas follows: (1) Where Thickness is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not lessthan 25 gage. (2) Where Furring is to Receive Cementitious Backer Board: Minimum to benot less than 20 gage (33 mils). (3) Where Furring is to Support Wall-Mounted Cabinets or Equipment: Minimum thickness to be not less than 20 gage (33 mils). 2. Resilient Furring Channels: Double-leg sections, designed to reduce airborne sound through a partition or ceiling assembly, or to comply with requirements forfire-rated assembly. a. Size (width): 1/2 inch (12 mm). b. Metal Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, as indicated on drawings, exceptas follows: 1) Where Thickness is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not lessthan 25 gage. 3. Z Furring: Z-shaped sections. a. Size (width): 1 inch (25 mm), 1-1/2 inches(38 mm), 2 inches (51 mm) or 2- 1/2 inches (64 mm), as indicated on drawings; if size is not indicated, providel-1/2 inch (38 mm). b. Leg Dimensions: 3/4 inch (19 mm)x 1-1/4 inches (32 mm); the 1-1/4 inch (32mm) leg is to be slightly toed in for a positive grip on the insulation. c. Metal Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, as indicated on drawings, except 092116-1 10 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road as follows: (1) Where Thickness is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not lessthan 25 gage. (2) Where Furring is to Receive Cementitious Backer Board: Minimum to benot less than 20 gage (33 mils). (3) Where Furring is to Support Wall-Mounted Cabinets or Equipment: Minimum thickness to be not less than 20 gage (33 mils). D. Soffit and Ceiling Support Materials: ASTM C645, G60 galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with specified deflection limits. 1. General: a. Steel ceiling support shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2514.5. b. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices compatiblewith indicated structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. c. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10x calculated loads. d. Post-tensioned Concrete Slabs: (1) For inserts placed in post-tensioned concrete work, maintain 3 inch clearance between inserts and prestressing strands. (2) If insert is in conflict with strand, insert must be moved to avoid strand.Do not move strands to avoid inserts. e. Hangers: (1) Steel wire or rods, sizes to comply with requirements of ASTM C754 forceiling or soffit area and loads to be supported. (2) Wire: ASTM A641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. (3) Rods and Flats: Mild steel components; Galvanized with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525. f. Framing System: (1) Main Runners: Cold-rolled, "C" shaped steel channels, 16 gauge minimum; galvanized with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525; form to required radius at curved gypsum board construction (e.g.,curved walls, soffits). (2) Cross Furring: Hat-shaped steel furring channels,ASTM C645, 7/8 inchhigh, 25 gauge, galvanized. (3) Furring Anchorages: 16 gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-type clips, bolts, nails or screws recommended by furringmanufacturer and complying with ASTM C754. 2. Steel Stud-Framed Ceilings, Braced Soffits, and Soffit Support Systems: a. Framing: C-shaped steel studs and runners. (1) Depth (flange): 1-1/4 inches (35 mm) minimum. (2) Return: 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum folded back return flange leg at eachside of studs. (3) Size (width): 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), 3-5/8 inches(92 mm),4 inches (102 mm),or 6 inches (152 mm), as indicated on 092116-1 11 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road Drawings. (4) Metal Thickness (gage): Minimum thickness to be not less than that required to meet or exceed applicable requirements of the governing building code based on span distance, stud spacing, stud size, loads, anddeflection criteria, in accordance with Limiting Span Charts and Tables for Steel Stud Ceiling Systems per SFIA(TG) or SSMA(PTI). 3. Suspended Grillage Ceiling Support System: a. Hanger Devices for Concrete: Post-installed, expansion anchor or chemical anchor, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires. (1) Hanger devices shall be capable of sustaining, without failure, a loadequal to not less than 10 times that imposed by construction, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488 by a qualifiedindependent testing agency. b. Hangers: Hangers shall comply with FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.4. (1) Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641 galvanized steel wire, pre-straightened;gauge per FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.4. (2) Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated; size per FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.4. (3) Flat Bar: Mild steel, zinc coated; 1 inch x 3/16 inch. (4) Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0312 inch thick galvanized steel sheet per ASTM A653, G60 coating, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts. c. Tie Wire:Tie wire shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2514.5.3.1. (1) Cross furring shall be securely saddle-tied to the main runners by not lessthan two strands of No. 16 W and M gauge galvanized wire or equivalentapproved attachments. (2) Cross furring shall be attached to joists or beams with double No. 14 Wand M gauge galvanized wire or equivalent approved attachments. (3) Splices in cross furring shall be lapped 8 inches and tied, each end, with double loops of No. 16-gauge wire. d. Main Carrying Channels (Runners): Main runners or carriers shall be minimum 1- 1/2 inch rolled galvanized steel channels of weights not less thanset forth in FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.2. e. Cross Furring- Metal Lath and Plaster Ceiling: Cross furring for various spacing of main runners or other supports shall be 3/4-inch galvanized steelchannels conforming to FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.3. f. Cross Furring-Gypsum Board Ceiling: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depthof 7/8 inch (22 mm). (1) Furring Size (width): 7/8 inch (22 mm) or 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 7/8 inch (22 mm). (2) Furring Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, per ASTM C754 and manufacturer's Limiting Ceiling Span Charts and Tables; if gage is not indicated, provide 20 gage. 4. Proprietary Suspended Drywall Ceiling Framing System: a. Material: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled steel, hot-dipped galvanized finish. b. Components: 092116-1 12 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road (1) Main Tees: Fire-rated, heavy-duty classification, with integral reversible splice with knurled face; 1.617 inches high x 144 inches long, with 1-1/2inches face width. (2) Cross Members (Cross Tees): Fire-rated, with knurled face; 1-1/2 incheshigh x 48 inches long, with 1-1/2 inches face width. (a) Tees must have quick-release cross tee ends to provide positive locking and removability without the need for tools. (3) Furring Channel: Fire-rated; 7/8 inches high x 48 inches long, with 1-1/2inches face width. (4) Accessory Cross Tees: Fire-rated, with knurled faces; 1-1/2 inches high x48 inches long,with 1-1/2 inches face width. (a) Tees must have quick-release cross tee ends to provide positive locking and removability without the need for tools. (5) Wall and Channel Moldings: Single web with knurled face. c. Accessories: Provide transition clips, splice clips,wall attachment clips, spliceplates, drywall clips, and other accessories as necessary for a complete installation. d. Trim: Commercial-quality cold-rolled 24-gauge steel; horizontal legs withhems formed for attachment to mounting clip; factory finish. (1) Face Width: As indicated on drawings. (2) Product: Compasso Trim by USG, or equal. e. Product: Flat Drywall Suspension System by USG, or equal. E. Accessories and Fasteners: 1. Miscellaneous Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs;thicknessto suit purpose; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C754. 2. Metal Angle (for shaftwall construction, corner framing at braced soffits, and other similar applications): Of same material as studs; 24-gage thickness; size 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C754. 3. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws; shall comply with FBC-BCHAPTER 25, and the following: a. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to steel runners shall be Type S (for 25-and22- gage) pan head or Type S-12 (for 20-gage or thicker) low profile head. b. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to door frames shall be Type S-12 pan head. c. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to jamb anchors shall be Type S-12 low profile head. d. Fasteners for attaching gypsum board to metal framing shall be Type S bugle-head, or length appropriate for thickness of board(s). e. Fasteners used for attaching cementitious tile backer board to metal studs shallbe corrosion-resistant,wafer head type with countersinking ribs, specifically designed to allow for flush seating while preventing strip-outs; length and product per backer board manufacturer's recommendation. Do not use standard drywall screws. f. Powder-driven fasteners are not allowed, except with Owner's written approval. 092116-1 13 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 4. Anchorage Devices: a. Power Actuated Fasteners(PAF): High-quality power-actuated fastener for attaching metal framing components (e.g., drywall runners) to concrete. (1) Embedment: 1 inch, min. (2) Allowable Service Load (based on 1 inch embedment into 4,000 psi concrete): (a) Tension: 90 Ibs, min. (b) Shear: 200 Ibs, min. (3) Product: X-ZF by Hilti,or equal. b. Concrete/Masonry Screw Anchors: Min. 1/4 inch dia. x 1-3/4 inch length concrete/masonry anchor screw with min. 1/4 inch (hole dia.)x 1.25 inch (OD)galy steel fender washer. (1) Head Type/ Dimension (across flat): Hex washer head/0.630 inch diameter, min. (2) Embedment: 1 inch, min. (3) Allowable Service Load (based on 1 inch embedment into 4,000 psi concrete): (a) Tension: 194 Ibs, min. (b) Shear: 310 Ibs, min. (4) Product:Tapcon Concrete and Masonry Anchors (with Maxi-Set Hex Washer Head) by ITW, or equal. 5. Tie Wires: Use tie wires not less than 16 gage galvanized annealed wire. 2.04 BOARD MATERIALS A. General: 1. All types of gypsum board materials shall comply with applicable requirements ofASTM C1396 and ASTM C36. 2. Panel sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut, except as otherwise indicated. B. Regular Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396 (Section 5), regular type. 1. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): Panel score of 10. 2. Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Average not greater than 5 percent by weight. 3. Edges:Tapered long edge. 4. Thickness: Use 5/8 inch thick for all applications, except where otherwise indicatedon Drawings. 5. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels by USG, orequal. C. Fire Rated (Type X) Gypsum Board: 1. UL-Classified for fire resistance (Type X), surface burning, and non- combustibility. 2. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): Panel score of 10. 3. Edges:Tapered long edge. 4. Thickness: Use 5/8 inch thick for all applications, except where otherwise indicatedon Drawings. 5. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Mold Tough Firecode Gypsum Panels by 092116-1 14 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road USG, or equal. D. Ceiling Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396(Section 12), non-sag type. 1. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): a. Non-Wet Areas: N/A. b. Wet Areas (e.g., Toilet/Shower Rooms): Panel score of 10. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Acceptable Product: a. Non-Wet Areas: Sheetrock brand UltraLight gypsum panels by USG, orequal. b. Wet Areas (e.g.,Toilet/Shower Rooms): Sheetrock brand Mold Tough Firecode Gypsum Panels by USG, or equal. E. Flexible Gypsum Board: 1. Specifically designed for use in curved applications without wetting. a. Minimum Inside (Concave) Dry Bending Radius: 20 inches (widthwise,w/stud spacing at maximum 9 inches o.c.). 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Flexible Gypsum Panels by USG, or equal. F. Cement Backer Board: Aggregated Portland cement backer board with woven glassfiber mesh facing; complying with ANSI A118.9. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch, as indicated on Drawings; if not noted, use 1/2inch. 2. Acceptable Product: Durock Cement Board by USG, or equal. 3. For additional information, refer to Section 093013 -Tiling. 2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Joint materials shall conform to ASTM C475. B. Joint Compounds: 1. All-Purpose Joint Compound: Drying type (ready-mixed)joint compound recommended for embedding, finishing, laminating and skim coating. a. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand All Purpose Joint Compound by USG,or equal. 2. Setting-Type Joint Compound: Chemically-hardening joint compound recommended for use with cement backer board and water-resistant gypsum board,and for treating fastener heads in areas to receive tile. a. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Setting-Type Joint Compound by USG,or equal. C. Primer Surfacer: Spray-applied vinyl acrylic latex-based coating, designed especially for interior application over Finish Level 4 (GA-214/ASTM C840) drywall surface inorder to achieve Finish Level 5 gypsum board finish. 1. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Tuff-Hide Primer-Surfacer by USG, orequal. D. Joint Treatment Tape: Type and width recommended by gypsum board manufacturer 092116-1 15 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road for project conditions. 1. For cement backer board joints, refer to Section 093013 -Tiling. 2.06 BEADS,TRIM AND MOLDINGS A. PVC Drywall Beads and Trim: One-piece extruded vinyl trim manufactured of high- impact resistant PVC,and conforming to ASTM D3678 and ASTM C1047; supplied byboard manufacturer. 1. Flanges of PVC trim components shall have punch hole pattern for positive bonding of joint compound and other finishes to surface of gypsum board; PVCmaterial shall have excellent paintability. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Tensile Strength/Tensile Modulus, min. (ASTM D638): 6,200 psi/390,000psi. b. Flexural Strength/ Flexural Modulus, min. (ASTM D790): 11,000 psi/35,000 psi. c. Flammability(ASTM E84): (1) Flame Spread: 18, maximum. (2) Fuel Contribution: ND. (3) Smoke Density, at 35 mils: 250, maximum. (4) Fire Rating: Class A. 3. Components: a. "J" Bead (Casing Bead):Tapered face return; back flange 1-3/16 inch; frontreturn 1/2 inch. (1) Product: #200X-series by PCI, or equal; size as appropriate for thicknessof gypsum board. b. Fillable "J" Bead: For use in encasing raw edges of drywall so as to prevent moisture from migrating into board; 1-1/16 inch wide perforated flange; back flange 3/8 inch. (1) Product: #201-series by PCI, or equal; size as appropriate for thicknessof gypsum board. c. Fillable "L" Bead: For use in creating a clean detail at any point of terminationof drywall into windows, doors, etc.; 1-1/16 inch wide perforated flange. (1) Product: #221-series by PCI, or equal; size as appropriate for thicknessof gypsum board. d. Shadow Molding ("Z" Molding): For use in creating a reveal or relief detailaround windows, doors, etc., and wall to wall details; 1-1/8 inch wide perforated flange; reveal size as indicated on drawings. (1) Product: #202/203/204 series by PCI, or equal; size as appropriate forreveal dimension. e. Corner Bead: (1) Regular Leg: For use on 90 degree outside corners; 1-1/4 inch perforatedand striated tapered legs. (a) Product: #209 by PCI, or equal. (2) Long Leg: For use on 90 degree outside corners; 1-5/8 inch perforatedand striated tapered legs. (a) Product: #209-XL by PCI, or equal. 092116-1 16 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road f. Inside Corner Bead: For use on 90 degree inside corners; 1-1/4 inch perforatedand striated tapered legs for better adhesion. (1) Product: #209-IC by PCI, or equal. g. Splayed Corner Bead: For use on 120 to 135 degree inside corners; 1-1/4 inch perforated and striated tapered legs for better adhesion. (1) Product: #209-135 by PCI, or equal. h. Drywall Reveal: Perforated flanges with a "U" channel; built-in stops forproper finish thickness. (1) Reveal Dimensions: Width as indicated on drawings x 1/2-inch depth. (2) Product: PCI Drywall Reveal, or equal. i. Control Joint: 1 inch wide perforated flanges with a "V" channel; built-instops for proper finish thickness. (1) Product: (a) Where Joint Movement Is Not Indicated: #2027-16 by PCI, or equal. (b) Where Joint Movement Is Not Indicated: #PL093-16 by PCI, orequal. B. Paper-Faced Metal Drywall Beads and Trim: Products shall comply with ASTM C1047, and shall be type recommended by manufacturer to reinforce architectural edgesand corners protecting them from chipping and cracking due to normal building movement and everyday wear-and-tear. 1. Materials: Shall be made with a strong, paper tape laminated to a sturdy, rust- resistant metal form, ensuring excellent adhesion of joint compounds, textures, andpaints 2. Profiles: Provide suitable trim profile for each edge and corner condition. a. Trims shall be available in a variety of profiles, including 90-degree and offsetoutside corner bead; 90-degree and offset inside corner bead; "L" shaped tape-on trim; "J" shaped tape-on trim; reveal tape-on trim; tape-on flexible corner; and tape-on flexible outside corner. b. Trims shall conform to profile and dimensions indicated on drawings; or if not indicated, conform to trim profile and dimensions suitable for each applicable condition in accordance with trim manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Product: Sheetrock brand Paper-Faced Metal Bead and Trim by USG, or equal. C. Extruded Aluminum Trim and Reveals: 1. Conform to profile and dimensions indicated. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5. 2.07 ACOUSTICAL MATERIALS A. Acoustical Sealant: A highly elastic,water-based caulking for sound-rated partition andceiling systems, and sealing exterior walls to reduce infiltration; non-bleeding and non-staining; pumpable; easily applied in beads. 1. Shall provide excellent adherence to most surfaces, permanent flexibility and lasting seal. 2. Shall meet or exceed ASTM C919 and ASTM C834. 3. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock brand Acoustical Sealant by USG, or equal. 4. Refer to Section 079005 -Joint Sealers,for additional requirements. 092116-1 17 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road B. Sound Attenuation Batts/Blankets (SAFB): Paperless, semi-rigid mineral fiber batts designed to improve STC ratings when installed in partitions. 1. Mineral fiber, conforming to ASTM C665,Type I. 2. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84: a. Flame spread: 15 or less. b. Smoke developed: 0. 3. Thicknesses: As indicated. 4. Acceptable Product:Thermafiber LLC Sound Attenuation Fire BlanketsSAFB (Fire Safety FS-15 Blankets), or equal. C. Hanger Wire Sound Isolators: Provide where indicated for sound-rated suspended ceilings. 2.08 CONCEALED BACKING MATERIALS A. Concealed Backer Plates: 1. At locations where cabinets, toilet compartments (e.g., toilet compartment wall brackets, urinal screen wall brackets, head rail brackets), surface-mounted toilet accessories (e.g., waste receptacles, mirrors, etc.), or other surface-mounted fittingsand accessories are to be attached to stud-framed or furred walls/partitions, providebacker plate(s) as follows: a. Backer plate(s) shall be of sufficient size and strength to provide secure attachment and support for item(s) being attached thereto. b. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, of dimensions as follows: (1) Width: 12 inches. (2) Length: 10 feet. (3) Metal Thickness: 20 gage, minimum. c. Product: Backing Plate (BPE) by Clarkwestern Dietrich, or equal. 2. Failure to provide backer plates for attachment of cabinets, toilet compartments, surface-mounted toilet accessories, or other surface-mounted fittings and accessories to stud framing or furring will not be allowed, regardless of whether ornot such backing plates are indicated on the drawings. 3. Direct attachment of cabinets, toilet compartments, surface-mounted toilet accessories, or other surface-mounted fittings and accessories to stud framing or furring will not be allowed, except with written approval by Architect. B. Concealed Anchor Plates: 1. At locations where grab bars are to be attached to stud-framed or furred walls/partitions, provide anchor plate(s) as follows: a. Anchor plate(s) shall be of sufficient size and strength to provide secure attachment and support for item(s) being attached thereto. b. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, of dimensions as follows: (1) Width: 3 inches. (2) Length: Varies, depending on item to be attached to wall/partition. (3) Metal Thickness: 12 gage, minimum. c. Product: Bobrick 2562 series Anchor Plate, or equal. 2. Failure to provide anchor plates for attachment of grab bars to stud framing or furring will not be allowed, regardless of whether or not such anchor plates are 092116-1 18 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road indicated on the drawings. 3. Direct attachment of grab bars to stud framing or furring will not be allowed, except with written approval by Architect. 2.09 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws. 1. For Steel Framing Less Than 0.03 Inch Thick: Comply with ASTM C1002. 2. For Steel Framing from 0.033 Inch Thick to 0.112 Inch Thick: Comply withASTM C954. 3. Provide Type S or Type S-12 screws. B. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide as required for complete installations. C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20,Type I - Inorganic. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required. B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements. C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which work is tobe installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install in accordance with most stringent requirements of the governing building code, manufacturer's installation instructions,guidelines and recommendations, and the requirements of this Section. B. Metal Framing: ASTM C754. C. Gypsum Board and Joint Treatment: ASTM C840. D. Tolerances: 1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 ft variation from plumb or level in exposed lines of surface, except at joints between gypsum board units. 2. Do not exceed 1/16 inch variation between planes of abutting edges or ends. 3. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances. E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install in accordance with specified UL Design as described inthe UL (FRD). F. Finishing: Perform in accordance with ASTM C840,to achieve finish levels specifiedin Finish Level Schedule included at end of this Section. 3.03 INSTALLATION -METAL FRAMING A. Metal Runners: 092116-1 19 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 1. Align and secure runner tracks accurately to partition layout at both floor and ceiling. 2. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate construction as recommended by manufacturer. B. Metal Studs: 1. Position metal studs vertically in the runners, spaced as indicated. a. Install studs at maximum 24 inches on center, except as otherwise indicated onthe drawings or where manufacturer's load tables indicate that stud spacing must be less in order to meet specified Design Requirements (e.g., load and deflection criteria). (1) Where 1-5/8 inch studs are installed adjacent to exterior concrete wall, each stud shall be attached to concrete wall with steel angle clip at mid-height of stud, using Tapcon fasteners sized for application. (2) Soffits, Braced: Install studs as indicated on drawings, at maximum 16inches on center. Unbraced soffits are not allowed. (3) Curved Gypsum Board Construction (e.g., Curved Walls, Soffits): Installstuds at maximum 9 inches on center. (4) Shaftwall Partitions: Install studs vertically at 24 inches on center. b. Where manufacturer's load tables indicate that stud spacing must be less than indicated above in order to meet specified SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load and deflection criteria), comply with spacing indicated in manufacturer's load tables. c. Provide double stud at the following locations: (1) Wall openings. (2) Door and window jambs; storefront mullions. (3) Not more than 2 inches from each side of openings. (4) Locations where necessary to provide adequate anchorage, bracing or support for wall-mounted items (e.g., handrail brackets, plumbing fixtures,toilet compartment partitions, wall cabinets, shelving standards, toilet accessories, hardware, etc.). (5) Other locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Place studs so that flanges face in same direction. 3. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 4. Align and plumb partition framing accurately. 5. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural elements, provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommendedby stud manufacturer to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements to partitions, and to provide lateral support. 6. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips orglass fiber strips between studs and wall. 7. Provide horizontal bracing where necessary for lateral support. 8. Chase Walls: a. Position steel studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other. b. Cut cross-bracing from gypsum board 12 inches high by chase wall width. C. Hat Channel Furring: 092116-1 20 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 1. Attach hat-shaped furring channels either vertically or horizontally with fasteners through alternate wing flanges (staggered). 2. Space furring channels at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. Where furring is indicated to receive backer board with ceramic tile, space at 16 inches oncenter. 3. Install furring channels within 4 inches of floor line and ceiling line. D. Z-Furring: 1. Securely attach narrow flanges of members to wall with concrete stub nails or power-driven fasteners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Sequence furring installation with installation of insulation. E. Ceiling and Soffit Support Systems(Suspended Ceiling Grillage System): 1. Secure hangers or rods to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible; otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices orfasteners indicated. 2. Space main runners, hangers and furring according to requirements of ASTMC754, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Where spacing of structural members, or width of ducts or other equipment, prevents regular spacing of hangers, provide supplemental hangers and suspensionmembers and reinforce nearest affected hangers to span extra distance. 4. Limitations: a. Steel studs are not designed to carry live loads, mechanical equipment, or material storage. b. Maximum Spacing: (1) 1-1/2 Inch Cold-Rolled Channels and Hangers: 48 inches on center. (2) For single-layer panels, maximum steel stud and furring channel spacingis 24 inches on center for perpendicular application and 16 inches on center for parallel application. (3) For panels used as base for spray-applied ceiling texture finish, maximumframe spacing is 16 inches on center for 1/2 inch thick panels perpendicularly applied (parallel panel application not recommended); 24inches on center for 5/8 inch thick panels perpendicularly applied, 16 inches on center for parallel application. 5. Attach directly to structural elements only; do not attach to metal deck. Loop hangers and wire-tie directly or provide anchors or inserts. 6. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Install compression posts, splay wires and other accessories as required to comply with wind load requirements. 7. Extend runners to within 6 inches of walls. 8. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports indicated. In fire resistance rated assemblies,wire-tie furring members; do not clip. 9. Do not permit furring or runners to contact masonry or concrete walls. 10. Provide 1 inch clearance between furring or runners and abutting walls and partitions. F. Steel Stud Ceiling System: 1. Steel stud framed ceilings may be installed at interior spaces not wider than (8) 092116-1 21 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road eight feet. 2. At spans greater than 8 feet, install Suspended Ceiling Grillage System unless framing members and spacing are specifically designed and recommended by manufacturer for proposed span and loading with specified deflection limits. 3. Install runner channels around perimeter of ceiling area where steel stud framing isto be installed. 4. Space main framing members at 16 inches o.c., with cross bracing at 48 inches o.c. 5. Where 25-gage steel studs are used, stud-end stiffeners are required. Install per manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION -FASTENERS AND ATTACHMENTS A. Gypsum wallboard shall be attached to metal members by self-drilling, self-tappingsteel screws conforming to requirements of FBC-B and as specified in this section. B. Screws used for attaching gypsum wallboard to metal framing members: 1. Shall be driven below the surface of gypsum wallboard without substantially fracturing the surface paper, and then spotted with finishing joint compound. 2. Shall be in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 2517.6.4. 3. Shall be not less than 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) long for 1/2 inch (17.7 mm)wallboard or1 inch (25.4 mm) long for 5/8 inch (17.1 mm)wallboard. a. Where securing multiple layers of wallboard, use screws of appropriate lengthin accordance with board manufacturer's instructions. b. At fire-resistance rated assembly, screw type and size shall comply with requirements of applicable UL Design as described in the UL(FRD). C. The spacing of screws attaching gypsum wallboard to metal framing members shall comply with board manufacturer's installation instructions, but in no instance shall screw spacing be more than 12 inches (305 mm) on center. 1. At fire-resistance rated assembly, install in accordance with screw spacing requirements per applicable UL Design as described in the UL(FRD). 3.05 INSTALLATION -BOARD MATERIALS A. Single Layer Gypsum Board on Metal Studs: 1. Loosely butt gypsum board joints together and neatly fit. 2. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 3. Maximum allowable gap at end joints: 1/8 inch. 4. Vertical joints to be centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on oppositesides of studs. 5. Horizontal joints to be backed by steel framing, unless otherwise recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. 6. Apply ceiling boards first where gypsum board ceilings and wall occur. 7. Cut openings in gypsum board to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, light fixtures and piping snugly and small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut bothface and back paper. 8. Screw board in place securely with screws spaced according to manufacturer's recommendations. 092116-1 22 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road B. Single Layer Gypsum Board on Furring: 1. Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to furring channel. 2. Center end joints over channel web; stagger end joints from those in adjacent rowsof board. 3. Fasten boards to furring channels with screws spaced according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Double Layer Gypsum Board: 1. Both layers to be fastened to studs or furring with screws in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Offset face-layer joints at least one stud cavity from parallel base-layer joints. D. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226 and manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 INSTALLATION -SOUND-RATED CONSTRUCTION A. Insulation: 1. Install sound attenuation blankets in sound-rated partitions and ceilings where indicated. 2. Completely fill space between studs and framing to full height of partition wall orfull area of ceiling. 3. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work penetrating sound-rated construction. 4. Install sound attenuation blankets in gaps between steel deck flutes and tops of sound- rated partitions, which are not fire-rated. Attach blankets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Gypsum Board: 1. Install gypsum board same as for interior partitions and ceilings. 2. Coordinate with installation of perimeter sealants. C. Acoustical Sealant: 1. At partition walls, provide continuous beads of acoustic sealant at juncture of bothfaces of runners with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, prior to installation of gypsum board. 2. At ceilings, provide continuous beads of sealant wherever gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3. Provide continuous bead of sealant behind faces of control joints prior to installation of control joint accessories. 4. After installation of gypsum board base layers, cut face layer sheets 1/2 inch less than floor-to-ceiling height and position with 1/4 inch open space between gypsumboard and floor, ceiling and dissimilar vertical construction. Fill 1/4 inch open space with continuous sealant beads after installation of face layer. 5. At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between gypsum board and fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of sealant. 6. Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely close off openings and joints. 092116-1 23 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road D. Sound Flanking Paths: 1. Where sound-rated partition walls intersect non-rated gypsum board partition walls, extend sound-rated construction to completely close sound flanking paths through non- rated construction. 2. Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersecting partitions. 3.07 INSTALLATION -TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Apply trim and accessories according to manufacturer's instructions. Sand after application of final joint treatment coat and leave surface smooth and ready forwork by other trades. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Place components consistent with lines of building spaces, except as indicated on drawings. 3. Treat metal accessories with not less than two coats of joint compound in the same manner as joints. Feather joint compound out from 8 to 10 inches on both sides of corners. 4. Apply trim at intersections where gypsum board abuts other materials, unless detailed otherwise, and at all other locations indicated. Neatly fit and secure cornerbeads over external corners. B. Beads,Trim, and Moldings: Install beads,trim, and moldings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer. 2. Corner Bead: Install corner bead at external corners. 3. Casing Bead: Install casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, or where shown on the drawings; and at allchanges of type of materials including plane changes. 4. Special Trim: Install as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials andas indicated. 6. Reveals: Install at locations where indicated; match existing. C. Control Joints and Expansion Joints: Install control joints and expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. Install control joints and expansion joints as detailed. 2. Install at locations where indicated, and as follows: a. Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or partitions of other finish material. b. Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits as indicated; if not indicated,then as directed by Architect. c. Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells, provide horizontal control joints at each floor level or as directed by Architect. 3.08 FINISHING A. Gypsum Board Surfaces: 092116-1 24 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road 1. General: a. Joint Compound: (1) After skim coat sets, apply finish coat of compound feathering 3 to 4 inches beyond tape edges. (2) Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32inch. b. Joint treatment and finishing of fire-rated assemblies shall conform to requirements of specified UL Design Assembly as described in the UL(FRD). c. For gypsum board surfaces designated to be painted, coordinate surface finishing with requirements specified in Section 099000- Painting and Coating. 2. Level of Finish: Provide levels of gypsum board finish in accordance with GA-214 /ASTM C840. a. Refer to FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE-GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES atthe end of this Section. 3. Prefill: a. Use setting-type joint compound. Mix joint compound according to manufacturer's directions. b. Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge. c. Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire-rated partitions. d. Wipe off excess compound and allow to harden. 4. Taping (ASTM C840 Level 1): a. Use taping joint compound or all-purpose joint compound. b. Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints. c. Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound. d. Remove excess compound. e. Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings. 5. First Coat (ASTM C840 Level 2): a. Use taping joint compound or all-purpose joint compound, or setting-type joint compound. b. Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound over body oftape and allow to dry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Apply first cost of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over exposed fastener heads; finish level with board surface. 6. Second Coat(ASTM C840 Level 3): a. Use all-purpose joint compound or topping joint compound. b. After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of compound over tapeand trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of first coat. 7. Third Coat(ASTM C840 Level 4): a. Use all-purpose joint compound or topping joint compound. b. After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat tojoints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of second coat. c. Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand, 092116-1 25 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish. 8. Skim Coat(ASTM C840 Level 5): a. Apply skim coat of all-purpose joint compound or primer surfacer(spray-applied vinyl acrylic latex-based coating) over exposed surfaces of gypsumboard. b. After skim coat has dried, touch-up and sand to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish. B. Cementitious Backer Board (substrate for tile wall finish): 1. Coordinate installation of cementitious backer board with requirements specified in Section 093013 -Tiling. 2. Prepare and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner appropriate for tile installation method specified in Section 093013-Tiling. C. Field Painting: As specified in Section 099000- Painting and Coating; sheen(s) andcolor(s) as selected by Architect. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finish work. B. Leave work smooth and uniform. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Support Metal and Framing: 1. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m). 2. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 3. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 4. Spacing of Studs and Other Framing Members: Variation not to exceed 1/8 inch. 5. Fastening Surfaces: Variation between adjacent members not to exceed 1/8 inch. 6. At walls/partitions where tile wall finish is indicated, refer to Section 093013—Tiling, for additional requirements. B. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. 1. Finished Gypsum Board Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. 2. Cementitious Backer Board Surface (Substrate for Tile Installation): 1/8 inch in 10feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction. a. In addition, surface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor morethan 1/32 inch between adjoining edges. b. For additional requirements, refer to Section 093013 -Tiling. 3.11 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE-GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES A. Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with GA-214/ ASTM C840. 1. Level 1: Gypsum board surfaces within ceiling plenum areas and other concealedareas, except provide higher level of finish as required to comply with fire 092116-1 26 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road resistance rating or acoustical rating. 2. Level 2: Substrate for tile installation, except remove tool marks and ridges; coordinate with requirements specified in Section 093013 -Tiling. 3. Level 3: a. Gypsum board surfaces of fire-rated assemblies that are entirely concealed from view; finishing system shall meet requirements of specified UL DesignAssembly. b. Gypsum board surfaces designated to receive textured finish or heavy vinylwall papering. 4. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is indicated or selected by Architect. 5. Level 5: Gypsum board surfaces requiring extra smooth surface for critical light, including but not limited to surfaces where semi-gloss or gloss paint finish is designated or selected by Architect. END OF SECTION 092116-1 27 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL STUD ASSEMBLIES 5200 College Road SECTION 093013 TILING PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Porcelain ceramic mosaic floor tile and glazed ceramic wall tile for interior applications. B. Precast cement terrazzo floor tile for interior applications. C. Mortar,grout and membrane materials. D. Joint sealant(for movement joints). E. Non-ceramic trim. F. Grout sealer. G. Patching and leveling compounds, and underlayment materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 042200 - Unit Masonry Assemblies B. Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Cement Backer Board Units (CBU) as substrate for wall and base tile installation; backer plate for attachment of toilet accessories; anchor plate for attachment of grab bars. C. Section 102800-Toilet Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards, see Section 014219— Reference Standards. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1—American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium). i) ANSI A108.1—American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile. a. ANSI A108.1a—American National Standard Specifications for TILING 093013-1 5200 College Road Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar. b. ANSI A108.1b—American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. c. ANSI A108.1c—Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ii) ANSI A108.10—American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. iii) ANSI A108.11 --American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. iv) ANSI A108.12 --American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior glue plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. v) ANSI A108.13 --American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone. vi)ANSI A118.3 --American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. vii) ANSI A118.4--American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. viii)ANSI A118.6--American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. ix)ANSI A118.9 --American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. x) ANSI A118.10--American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation. xi)ANSI A118.12—American National Standard for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installations. xii) ANSI A136.1—American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. ANSI A137.1 --American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 3. ANSI A138.1 --Green Squared American National Standard Specifications for Sustainable Ceramic Tiles, Glass Tiles, and Tile Installation Materials. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A82 --Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A185 --Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,for Concrete. 3. ASTM A653 --Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. TILING 093013-2 5200 College Road 4. ASTM C109 --Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or(50-mm) Cube Specimens). 5. ASTM C309 --Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 6. ASTM C348--Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars. 7. ASTM C373 --Standard Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density,Apparent Porosity, and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products. 8. ASTM C482 --Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 9. ASTM C484--Standard Test Method for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile. 10. ASTM C501 --Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. 11. ASTM C609 --Standard Test Method for Measurement of Light Reflectance Value and Small Color Differences Between Pieces of Ceramic Tile. 12. ASTM C627 --Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson Type Floor Tester. 13. ASTM C648--Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 14. ASTM C650--Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances. 15. ASTM C794--Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 16. ASTM C920--Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 17. ASTM C1028--Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull--Meter Method. 18. ASTM C1243 --Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Deep Abrasive Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by Rotating Disc. 19. ASTM C1378--Standard Test Method for Determination of Resistance to Staining. 20. ASTM D737 --Standard Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics. 21. ASTM D751 --Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabric. 22. ASTM D1117 --Standard Guide for Evaluating Nonwoven Fabrics. 23. ASTM D3776--Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric. 24. ASTM D4068--Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE)Sheeting for Concealed Water-Containment Membrane. 25. ASTM D4397 --Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 26. ASTM D4551 --Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane. 27. ASTM D5034--Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test). 28. ASTM D5957 --Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal Waterproofing Installations. 29. ASTM E84--Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 30. ASTM E96--Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 31. ASTM E970--Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. D. Florida Building Code, Current edition (FBC): TILING 093013-3 5200 College Road A. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (Current Edition). B. FBC-A-- Florida Building Code,Accessibility; 2012 edition. E. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials(IAPMO). F. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): A. ISO 13007--Standards for Adhesives and Grouts. G. The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (NTMA): 1. NTMA(SPECS) --Terrazzo Specifications. H. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 1. TCNA(HB) --TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 410--Slip Resistance of Floor Surface Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: A. For submittal procedures and additional requirements, refer to Section 007200- General Conditions, and Section 013000-Administrative Requirements. B. Submittals for this section are to be coordinated with submittals required in Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies and Section 102800-Toilet Accessories. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' product data sheets and installation instructions for each of the following: A. Tile (including Porcelain Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile, Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile, and Precast Terrazzo Tile): Include physical and performance characteristics for each product to be used. A. Mark to identify each type, size, and shape required. B. Precast Terrazzo Tile: A. Include NTMA maintenance literature. B. Include manufacturer's Quality Assurance Program and performance test reports. C. Mortar and Grout Materials: Include manufacturer's instructions for mixing and installing. b. Indicate ISO 13007 classification for each type grout and mortar to be used; coordinate with shop drawings to indicate which product will be used in each designated application. D. Joint sealer and backer materials for use in movement joints. E. Cement backer board materials. F. Membranes and associated products. G. Terrazzo cleaner and terrazzo sealer products. C. Shop Drawings: A. Shop drawings for this section are to be coordinated with submittals required in Section 055100- Metal Stairs, Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies, and Section 142010 -Passenger Elevators. A. Provide elevator manufacturer with elevator cab floor recess depth dimension required for tile floor installation, and weight (dead load) of tile floor assembly. TILING 093013-4 5200 College Road B. Indicate field-verified dimensions for all surfaces to receive tile; coordinate with tile layout. C. For each type installation, indicate applicable TCNA tile installation method. A. Indicate compliance with specified reference standards for materials and installation specifications. B. Where installation method includes options or alternatives, indicate selected options and alternatives. C. Indicate thickness of setting materials, and coordination with related components(e.g., door threshold, floor drain, etc.). D. Indicate ISO 13007 classification for grout and mortar to be used in each designated application. D. Indicate accessory materials, including but not limited to patching and leveling compound, waterproofing, cement backer units,joint sealer,grout, etc. E. Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,junction with dissimilar materials, movement joints, and setting details. A. Indicate alignment of floor, base and wall joints. F. Indicate interface between materials specified in this section and materials specified elsewhere, including but not limited to sheet metal flashing, floor drains, and door thresholds. D. Samples: A. Selection Samples: A. Tile: For each type of tile (except tile for which color and finish is specified),submit manufacturer's complete range of color samples(including samples of all Price/Color Groups),for Architect's initial selection. B. Grout: For each type of grout, submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. B. Verification Samples: Mount selected tile and apply selected grout on plywood panels; each sample panel to be 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm) in size, illustrating tile pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations for each of the following conditions: A. Panel A: Wall tile installation, with Tile Type GWT-1. B. Panel B: Floor tile installation, with Tile Type MFT-1. C. Panel C: Floor tile installation,with Tile Type CFT-1. e. Panel D: Floor tile installation, with Tile Type TFT-1. E. LEED Submittals: None. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCNA(HB) and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum ten (10)years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation,with TILING 093013-5 5200 College Road minimum of ten (10)years of documented experience. D. Certifications: A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. B. Recycled Content Certification: Provide third-party (e.g., Scientific Certification Systems)certification to verify recycled content claims. E. Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 2103, 2121 and 2520. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be stored and protected from damage in accordance with manufacturer's delivery, storage and handling instructions. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of mortar materials in accordance with mortar manufacturer's recommended instructions. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranties: Manufacturer shall warrant that its product(s) or system will be free from defects and will not fail under normal usage for the applicable warranty period. A. Acceptable Exclusions: Structural failure; damages caused by Acts of God, including, but not limited to hurricane, flooding, earthquake or other types of natural disaster; acts of negligence, or product misuse or abuse; subfloor moisture or water damage; normal wear and tear resulting from usage; cracking due to structural movement,excessive deflection or other failure of the substrate. B. Remedy: Replacement or repair of defective products. B. Warranty Period: A. General: A. Warranty period shall commence on the effective date of Substantial Completion. B. Membrane, Mortar and Grout Materials (Waterproof Membrane/Crack Suppression Membrane; Mortar; Grout;Joint Sealer): A. Manufacturer's Product Warranties: 5 years. B. Manufacturer's Commercial System Warranty: 15 years. C. Shower Pan Liner: Life of original installation. D. Tile: 1 year. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. General: All products of each type shall be by the same manufacturer. B. Porcelain Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile and Ceramic Wall Tile: TILING 093013-6 5200 College Road 1. DalTile: www.daltile.com (Local Mfr Rep:Alexandra Stefan (alexandra.stefan@daltile.com;Tel. 305-477-8216). 2. American Olean: www.americanolean.com (Local Mfr Rep: Carole Schafineister (carole@dbtile;Tel. 954-907-3226)). 3. Crossville, Inc.: www.crossvilleinc.com (Local Mfr Rep: Carole Schafineister (carole@dbtile;Tel. 954-907-3226)). C. Precast Terrazzo Tile: 1. Basis of Design: Wausau Tile, Inc.; 9001 Business Hwy 51; Rothschild,W1.54474; www.wausautile.com 2. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent products manufactured by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration D. Membrane, Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Basis of Design: Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.us. 2. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent products manufactured by one of the following may be submitted for consideration: a. Bonsal American, Inc. (an Oldcastle company): www.prospec.com. b. Laticrete International, Inc.: www.laticrete.com. c. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc. (SGM): www.sgm.cc. E. Shower Pan Liner: 1. Compotite Corporation:www.compotite.com. 2. Noble Company:www.noblecompny.com. F. Joint Sealant: 1. Basis of Design: Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.us. 2. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent products manufactured by one of the following may be submitted for consideration: a. BASF. b. Laticrete International, Inc.: www.laticrete.com. c. Tremco. G. Patching and Leveling Compound, and Underlayment Materials: Same as Waterproofing Membrane, Mortar and Grout Materials manufacturer. H. Non-Ceramic Trim: 1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems, LP: 194 Pleasant Ridge Road; Pittsburgh, NY12901- 5841; Tel. 800-477-9783. I. Substitutions: See Section 007200 -General Conditions and Section 016000- Product Requirements. 2.02 UNGLAZED PORCELAIN CERAMIC MOSAIC FLOORTILE A. General: 1. All mosaic floor tile products shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the requirements of,ANSI A137.1. 3. Slip Resistance:Tile flooring surfaces shall be stable, firm, and slip resistant; and shall TILING 093013-7 5200 College Road comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1003 and 1028 and FBC-A SECTION 302. a. In addition, tile flooring surfaces in wet areas (e.g.,toilet rooms, locker rooms, showers, etc.) shall have minimum Wet DCOF AcuTest (ANSI A137.1, Section 9.6) value of 0.42. B. Mosaic Floor Tile (Type MFT-1, and Type MFT-2): 1. Dimensions: 1 inch hexagon (non-abrasive), nominal (15/16 x 15/16 inch, actual);1/4 inch thick. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648): 300 Ibf, min. b. Water Absorption (ASTM C373): 0.5 percent, max. c. Scratch Hardness (MOH's Scale): 7, min. d. Slip Resistance (Floor Tile): (1) DCOF AcuTest Value (ANSI A137.1, Section 9.6): (a) Type MFT-1: 0.42, min. (b) Type MFT-2: Greater than 0.42. (2) Static Coefficient of Friction - Dry(ASTM C1028): (a) Type MFT-1: 0.7, min. (b) Type MFT-2: 0.8, min. (3) Static Coefficient of Friction -Wet (ASTM C1028): (a) Type MFT-1: 0.6, min. (b) Type MFT-2: 0.7, min. 3. Product: "Unglazed ColorBody Porcelain Mosaics" by American-Olean, or accepted equal. a. Matching Trim Units: N/A. b. Surface Finish: (1) Type MFT-1 (for use at all locations where Mosaic Floor Tile is indicted, except showers): Slip resistant;American-Olean "non-abrasive", or equal. (2) Type MFT-2 (for use at shower floors): Slip resistant;American-Olean "abrasive", or equal. c. Color(s): American-Olean "Ice White A25",or equivalent color. 2.03 GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILE A. General: 1. All ceramic wall tile products shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the requirements of,ANSI A137.1. B. Glazed Wall Tile (Type GWT-1): 1. Dimensions: 3 x 6 inch (7.6 x 15.2 cm); 5/16 inch thick. 2. Matching Trim Units: Bullnose, bulllnose corner, cove, and cove base outcorner; dimensions to match field tile. 3. Surface Finish: Semi-gloss. 4. Shade Variation: TILING 093013-8 5200 College Road a. Solid Color: V1. b. Speckled Color: V3. 5. Performance Requirements: a. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648): 230 Ibf, min. b. Water Absorption (ASTM C373): Over 7.0 but less than 20.0 percent. c. Scratch Hardness (MOH's Scale): 6.5, min. d. Shade Variation: V1. 6. Product: "Rittenhouse Square 36MOD1PA" by Dal-Tile, or approved equivalent product. a. Color(s): "Arctic White 0190". 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONCRETE FLOOR TILE A. General: 1. Description: Concrete composite tiles produced with a blend of polymers, recycled content, and concrete materials. 2. All flexible concrete tile products shall be by the same manufacturer. 3. Tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the requirements of,ANSI A137.1. 4. Slip Resistance:Tile flooring surfaces shall be stable, firm, and slip resistant; and shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1003 and 1028 and FBC-A SECTION 302. B. Concrete Floor Tile(Type CFT-1): Not used. 2.05 FLOOR TILE A. General: 1. Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33,ASTM C131; natural, sound, crushed marble, stone, recycled glass or recycled porcelain chips without excessive flats or flakes, complying with NTMA requirements 3. Coloring/ Matrix Pigments: Pure mineral or synthetic pigments, resistant to alkalis and non-fading, conforming to manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Tile Protection: Manufactured units shall be provided with a factory-applied initial protectant. TILING 093013-9 5200 College Road 2. Mixes: Manufactured terrazzo units shall have 70 percent coverage of the tile face with marble, stone, recycled glass or recycled porcelain aggregate. 3. Fabrication: a. Mechanically vibrated in molds. b. Hydraulically pressed by 900-ton/3250 psi press. c. Steam-cured with 100 percent humidity for 18 hours at 140 deg F. d. Factory Finish: In-line grinding. e. Factory applied initial protectant. 4. Finishes (Surfaces and Edges): a. All exposed edges to be ground and polished with a minimum of 1/16 inch bevel. b. All finished surfaces to be ground and polished, free of holes and to have overall uniformity in matrix and aggregate. c. Surfaces to be uniform in appearance. d. All precast terrazzo finished surfaces to be sealed with a sealer approved by manufacturer. 5. Colors: a. TZ 22 b. TZ 90 6. Performance Requirements: a. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, min. b. Water Absorption (ASTM C373): Pass. c. Bond Strength (ASTM C482): 376 psi, min. d. Color Uniformity(ASTM C609): V1 to V4. e. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648): 981 Ibf, min. f. Resistance to Chemical Substance (ASTM C650): No affect. g. Flexural Properties (ASTM C674): 1995 psi, min. h. Deep Abrasion Wear(ASTM C1243): Pass; shall meet p3 standards. i. Resistance to Staining(ASTM C1378): No affect. j. Slip Resistance: Precast cement terrazzo tile flooring surfaces shall be stable, firm, and slip resistant; and shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1003and 1028 and FBC-A SECTION 302. 7. Source Quality Control: a. Quality Control Testing: Quality control testing shall be completed on the first day's production, and on every 5,000 square feet thereafter. Perform testing on the seventh day after the tile has been pressed, and on the twenty-eighth day after the tile has been pressed. (1) Provide documented inspection of terrazzo tile quality control tests. B. Terrazzo Floor Tile (Type TFT-1): 1. Manufactured Units: a. Size: TILING 093013-10 5200 College Road (1) Type TFT-1: 12 x 24 inches, nominal (11-13/16 x 23-13/16 inches, actual), x 5/8 inch thick. 2. Dimensional Tolerances: a. Size (ASTM C499): Range of 0.029 in. b. Thickness (ASTM C499): Range of 0.029 in. c. Warpage (ASTM C485): (1) Edge: +/-0.001 percent or 0.002 in, max. (2) Diagonal: +/-0.003 percent or 0.010 in, max. d. Wedging(ASTM C502): +/-0.023 percent or 0.028 in, max. 2. Product: Wausau Tile Terrazzo Tile, or equal. 2.06 PORCELAIN CERAMIC TILE A. General: 1. All porcelain ceramic tile products shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Porcelain ceramic tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the requirements of, ANSI A137.1. 3. Performance Requirements: a. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648): Minimum 350 Ibf. b. Bond Strength (ASTM C482): Minimum 200 psi. c. Water Absorption (ASTM C373): Maximum 0.10 percent. d. Abrasion Wear(ASTM C501): Minimum 270 Ibf. e. Chemical Resistance (ASTM C650): Resistant (unaffected). f. Scratch Hardness (MOH's Scale): 6. B. Porcelain Ceramic (Type PCFT-1): 1. Product: "Fabrique ColorBody Porcelain" by Dal Tile,or accepted equal. 2. Size and Shape: 12 x 24 inches (nominal), 11-3/4 inches x 23-9/16 inches 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unpolished 6. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C1028): (1) Dry: 0.7, minimum. (2) Wet: 0.60, minimum 7. Colors:Two colors,to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range. 2.06 MORTAR&SETTING MATERIALS A. General: 1. Shall contain anti-microbial protection to inhibit the growth of stain-causing mold and mildew in the substrate. 2. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for application and substrate condition. 3. Mortar materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements. TILING 093013-11 5200 College Road B. Mortar Type 1: Factory-blended mixture of finely graded sand and latex-modified Portland cement, designed for use as thick-bed mortar(3/8 inch to 3 inch), complying with ANSI A108.1a and as follows: 1. General: a. Shall be compatible with mortar bond coat materials. b. Suitable for bonded or unbounded, screeded or sloped, and interior or exterior applications. c. Consistency of Mix: Screed mortar. 2. Performance Requirements (28 days): a. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.4 and ASTM C109): 4,000 psi, min. b. Flexural Strength (ASTM C348): 1,100 psi, min. c. Pull-out: 300 psi, min. 3. Product: MAPEI 4-to-1 Mortar Mix gauged with MAPEI Planicrete AC,or equal. C. Mortar Type 2: High-performance, flexible,thin-set/ bond coat mortar, complying with ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007 Classification C2FS2P2. 1. General: a. Shall be compatible with applicable substrate materials, including but not limited to thick bed mortar, concrete, CMU, and cement backer board. 2. Product: MAPEI Granirapid Premium Rapid-Setting Flexible Thin Mortar, orequal. D. Mortar Type 3: 100-percent solids, high-strength, chemical-resistant, non-sagging, epoxy setting mortar, complying with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007 Classification R2. 1. Product: MAPEI Kerapoxy 410, or equal. 2.07 GROUT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Shall contain anti-microbial protection to inhibit the growth of stain-causing mold and mildew or mildew. 2. Grout materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements. B. Grout Type 1: Premium-grade, pre-blended, fast-setting, polymer-modified, color- consistent, non-shrinking, efflorescence-free, sanded portland-cement tile grout, complying with ANSI A118.6 and ISO 13007 Classification CG2WAF. 1. General: a. Shall be recommended by manufacturer for joint widths from 1/16 inch to 1 inch in wet-or dry-area applications. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Compressive Strength (28 days): 5,000 psi, min. b. Flexural Strength (7 days): 1,000 psi, min. 3. Acceptable Product: MAPEI Ultracolor Plus, or equal. 4. Color(s): Up to three colors, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range of colors. TILING 093013-12 5200 College Road C. Grout Type 2: Premium-grade, water-cleanable, 100-percent solids, high-strength, chemical-resistant, non-sagging, stain-free, reaction resin grout for joints in wet-area applications, complying with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007 Classification R2T/RG. 1. Product: MAPEI Kerpaoxy, or equal. D. Grout Type 3: Premium-grade water-based styrene acrylic co-polymer with a proprietary admixture package using coated quartz aggregate technology. 1. Product: MAPEI Flexcolor CO. 2. Note: this product can be used for grouting of all specified tile in this project. 2.08 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: 1. Membrane materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements, and shall be compatible with other materials used in the assembly. B. Waterproof Membrane / Crack Suppression Membrane: Thin, flexible, seamless load- bearing waterproofing and crack isolation membrane formed from a single component, self- curing, liquid rubber polymer with embedded reinforcing fabric. 1. General: a. Shall provide a thin, continuous barrier to protect adjacent rooms and floors below from water damage, and to provide in-plane crack isolation over hairline cracking or spider-webbing in the substrate, and over shrinkage and other nonstructural cracks up to 1/8 inch in width. b. Shall be compatible with applicable substrate materials, including but not limited to thick bed mortar,thin-set/ bond coat mortar, concrete, CMU, cement backer board, and reinforcing fabric. 2. Physical and Performance Requirements: a. Shall meet or exceed requirements of ANSI A108.10 and ANSI A108.12 standards. b. Shall be IAPMO-listed for use as a shower pan liner. c. Service Rating (ASTM C627): Extra Heavy. 3. Final Dry Thickness (2 coats): 20 mils, nom. 4. Acceptable Product: MAPEI Mapelastic AquaDefense, or equal. C. Reinforcing Fabric(for use with Waterproof Membrane/Crack Suppression Membrane): Ready-to-use,thin, flexible, alkali-resistant, nonwoven polyester fabric. 1. General: a. Provide reinforcing fabric at locations where recommended by manufacturer, including but not limited to cracks, coves, corners and areas around drains, to provide a durable, reliable barrier to water migration into adjacent areas. b. Shall be compatible with liquid rubber polymer membrane materials. 2. Physical and Performance Requirements: a. Fabric Weight (ASTM D3776): 2.06 oz per sq yd. b. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D5034): MD 57.3 Ibf/TD 52.8 Ibf. TILING 093013-13 5200 College Road c. Grab Tensile Elongation (ASTM D5034): MD 50 percent/TD 55 percent. d. Trapezoidal Tear(ASTM D1117): 24.7 Ibf. e. Thickness (ASTM D1117): 13.6 mils. f. Air Permeability(ASTM D737): 670 cfm. 3. Product: MAPEI Reinforcing Fabric, or equal. D. Cleavage Membrane: Minimum 4.0 mils (0.1 mm)thick polyethylene plastic film complying with requirements of ASTM D4397. E. Shower Pan Liner: Sheet membrane waterproofing, specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Shower pan liner shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-P SECTION 417.5.2. 2. Material: Floors under shower compartments shall be lined and made water tight utilizing one of the following materials: a. Plasticized polyvinyl chloride(PVC)sheets shall be a minimum of 0.040 inch(1.02 mm)thick, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D4551. Sheets shall be joined by solvent welding in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Non-plasticized chlorinated polyethylene sheet shall be a minimum 0.040 inch (1.02 mm)thick, and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D4068.The liner shall be joined in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Physical and performance properties shall comply with the following standards: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate (ASTM E96): 0.045 inch, max. 4. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Camposeal Blue Vinyl Shower Pan manufactured by Campotite. b. Chloraloy sheet membrane manufactured by Noble Company. F. Vapor Retarder Membrane at Walls: Minimum 6-mils thick polyethylene plastic film complying with ASTM D4397 is required behind cement backer board. 1. To be installed between face of metal studs/furring and cement backer board. 2. To be tied into the floor waterproofing membrane in order to establish continuous seal at interface between floor membrane and wall membrane. 3. Tile installer to coordinate installation. 2.09 MOVEMENT JOINT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit TILING 093013-14 5200 College Road application. C. Backup Strip: A flexible and compressible type of closed cell foam polyethylene, butyl rubber, or open cell and closed cell polyurethane, rounded to contact sealant, as shown in TCNA(HB) Method EJ171 details, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1. Backup strip must fit neatly into the joint without compacting and to such a height to allow a sealant depth of 1/2 the width of the joint. 2. Sealant must not bond to the backup material. D. Joint Sealant: High-performance, one-component, neutral-cure, 100-percent silicone sealant designed for ceramic tile applications, conforming to ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, and G. 1. Adhesion: Shall conform to ASTM C794. 2. Shall be equipped with fungicides to resist mold and mildew growth. 3. Shall be resistant to pool chemicals. 4. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range. 5. Product: MAPEI Mapesil, or equal. 2.10 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect mortar or grout mix. B. Tile Setting Accessories: 1. Joint Spacers: Plastic; size specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions for tile thicknesses and joint widths indicated. 2. Tile Edge: Stainless steel angle, leg length equal to depth of tile or panel and setting bed. 3. Miscellaneous Accessories: Supply additional components specified in ANSI and TCNA specifications for indicated installations. C. Patching and Leveling Compound, and Underlayment: Latex-portland mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 and designed for screeds, patching and leveling beds, and scratch/plaster coats; suitable for repairing subfloors in commercial and institutional applications. 1. General: a. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable. 2. Patching and Leveling Compound: Engineered, polymer-modified, fiber- reinforced, cement-based,skimcoating and patching compound. a. Thickness: Featheredge to 1/2-inch. b. Performance Requirements (28 days): (1) Compressive Strength (ASTM C109): 3,500 psi, min. c. Acceptable Products: MAPEI Mapecem Quickpatch, or equal. 3. Self-leveling Underlayment: High-strength, self-leveling, cement-based underlayment and repair mix. a. Thickness: Featheredge to 1-1/2 inches. TILING 093013-15 5200 College Road b. Performance Requirements (28 days): (1) Compressive Strength (ASTM C109): 4,400 psi, min. (2) Flexural Strength (ASTM C348): 1,100 psi, min. c. Acceptable Products: MAPEI Ultraplan 1 Plus, or equal. D. Reinforcing: 1. Wire Reinforcing Mesh: 2 inch x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) x 16 ASW gauge or 0.0625inch (1.6mm) diameter galvanized steel welded wire mesh complying with ASTMA185 and ASTM A82. 2. Glass Fiber Mesh Tape: 2-inch (50 mm)wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape. E. Grout Sealer:Water-based grout sealer designed to resist water, oil and acid-based contaminants, and to simplify maintenance. 1. General: a. Shall not change the appearance of the grout. b. Shall allow moisture vapor transmission. c. Suitable for cementitious sanded or unsanded grout joints, interior and exterior applications, and walls or floors. d. Expected Wear Duration: 5 years, minimum. 2. Product: As recommended by grout manufacturer. F. Cement Backer Board Units (CBU): Refer to Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies. G. Fasteners (for attaching Cement Backer Board panels to stud framing): Non-corrosive and non-oxidizing, hot-dipped galvanized fasteners conforming to ASTM A653. 1. Refer to Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies for additional requirements. H. Non-Ceramic Trim: Metal, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting usingtile mortar. 1. Movement and Control Joint Profiles: a. Product: Schluter Dilex-EDP Stainless Steel Movement Joint. H. Terrazzo Cleaner: Liquid, neutral-pH, chemical cleaner, of formulation recommended by sealer manufacture for type of precast terrazzo used, and complying with NTMA requirements. 1. Shall be approved by precast terrazzo products manufacturer for type of precast terrazzo used. I. Terrazzo Sealer: Colorless, neutral-pH, slip-resistant, stain-resistant, penetrating sealer that will not affect color or physical properties of precast terrazzo surface. 1. Film Color: Clear; non-yellowing. 2. Slip Resistance(UL 410): Shall be UL Classified for slip resistance. 3. Shall meet requirements of ASTM C309. 4. Shall be approved by precast terrazzo products manufacturer for type of precast terrazzo used. TILING 093013-16 5200 College Road PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Subsurface/Substrate Tolerances: Contractor shall provide tile substrates complying with TCNA(HB)guidelines for"Subsurface Tolerance" and the following criteria, whichever is the most stringent: 1. Concrete Sub-floor(Substrate for Floor Tile): a. Finish slab free from small hollows or bumps and graded to the elevations called for, with depressions in floors between high spots not greater than 1/8 inch below a 10-foot straightedge in accordance with ACI 302 Surface Finish Tolerance, and not more than 1/4 inch between opposite exterior walls, unless otherwise called for on the Drawings. b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges. 2. CMU/Concrete Wall (Substrate for Wall Tile/Wall Base Tile): a. Variation from required plane of the backer board surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges. 3. Cement Backer Board (Substrate for Wall Tile/Wall Base Tile): a. Variation from required plane of the backer board surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges. B. Sub-floor Surfaces: 1. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are: a. Smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. b. Dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. 2. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. C. Wall Substrate Surfaces: 1. Solid Substrate: Verify that wall substrate surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. 2. Stud Framing: Verify that support metal and framing systems are installed to meetthe tolerances specified in Section 092116-Gypsum Board Assemblies as well as in this section, whichever are the most stringent; and ready for installation of cement backer board. a. Metal studs shall be well braced; minimum 20 gage; minimum 3-5/8 inch depth; maximum stud spacing 16 inches on center. 3.02 PREPARATION TILING 093013-17 5200 College Road A. General: 1. Protect surrounding work from damage. 2. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. 3. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 4. Provide full waterproofing membrane under all bathroom and janitor closet room floor prior to tile system installation. 5. Prepare substrate surfaces in accordance with Waterproofing Membrane, Mortar and Grout Materials manufacturer's recommendations. B. Concrete Floor Slab Substrate: 1. Bondability: a. Where tile is to be installed, concrete slabs should not have air entrainment or other additives in the mix, nor sealers or curing compounds applied without specific approval of mortar and grout manufacturer. b. Slabs should have steel trowel and fine broom finish and be free of laitance. c. In case of any question on condition of slab, it should be tested for bondability with a Dillon Dynamometer, and show a tensile bond of not less than 300 psi. 2. Cleaning: a. Where sealer, curing compound, bond breaker, densifier/hardener, adhesive or other surface coating has been applied to concrete substrate, it must be removed. b. Chip out loose material, clean off all oil, grease dirt, adhesives, curing compounds, and other deterrents to bonding. (1) Use self-contained power blast cleaning systems to remove curing compounds and steel trowel finish from concrete substrates where ceramic tile will be installed directly on concrete surface with thin-set materials. (2) Steam cleaning or the use of acids and solvents for cleaning will not be permitted. 3. Levelness: a. General: (1) Before tile is applied,test structural floor for levelness or uniformity of slope by water. Fill, level, and retest areas as required to meet tolerances specified in Section A-3 of ANSI A108.1 and retest. (2) When specified levelness or uniformity of slope is obtained, prepare floorsfor setting bed in accordance with ANSI A108.1. b. Patching and Leveling: (1) Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. (2) Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required plane with patching and leveling compound. (a) Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to elevation shown. TILING 093013-18 5200 College Road (b) Float finish,except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing. (c) At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. (3) Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall surfaces that are out of required plane. (4) Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane. 5. Refer to Section 090561-Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation for additional requirements. C. Concrete and Masonry Substrate: 1. Cleaning: a. Chip out loose material, clean off all oil, grease dirt, adhesives, curing compounds, and other deterrents to bonding by mechanical method, or by using products specifically designed for cleaning concrete and masonry. b. Use self-contained power blast cleaning systems to remove curing compounds and steel trowel finish from concrete substrates where ceramic tile will be installed directly on concrete surface with thin-set materials. c. Steam cleaning or the use of acids and solvents for cleaning will not be permitted. 2. Concrete/CMU Walls: a. Concrete/ masonry to be well cured, dimensionally stable, and free of cracks, waxy or oily films, and curing compounds. b. At concrete walls, use self-contained power blast cleaning systems to remove steel trowel finish and establish Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) per mortar manufacturer's recommendations. D. Cement Backer Board Substrate: 1. Prior to installation of Cement Backer Board, install Vapor Retarder Membrane at Walls over entire wall area where Cement Backer Board Unit is to be installed. a. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Install Cement Backer Board Units in accordance with ANSI A108.11, Cement Backer Board manufacturer's instructions, and applicable requirements of the Florida Building Code. 3. Install Cement Backer Board Units horizontally or vertically to minimize joints, with end joints over framing members. a. Cement Backer Board Units with rounded edges: Face rounded edge away from studs, to form a V-joint for joint treatment. 4. Secure Cement Backer Board Units to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 8 inches (200 mm) on center and not closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the edge of the Cement Backer Board Units, or as recommended by CementBacker Board manufacturer. Install screws so that the screw heads are flush with the surface of the backer unit. TILING 093013-19 5200 College Road 5. Where Cement Backer Board Unit joins waterproofing, lap backer unit over turned up waterproof system. Install fasteners only through top one-inch of turned up waterproof systems. 6. Remove polyethylene wrapping from Cement Backer Board Units and separate to allow for air circulation. a. Allow moisture content of backer units to dry down to a maximum of 35 percent before applying joint treatment and tile. 7. Joint Treatment: a. Horizontal Joints: 1/8-inch spacing, filled solid with latex-portland cement mortar and taped with 2-inch alkali-resistant glass fiber mesh tape. b. Vertical Joints: Filled solid with latex-portland cement mortar and taped with2- inch alkali-resistant glass fiber mesh tape. c. Corners: Leave space between backer board units.Tape joints with skim coatof latex-portland cement mortar, but don't fill. E. Shower Pan Liner: 1. Before installing shower pan liner: a. Subfloor shall be free of projections (e.g.,edges of aggregate). b. Drain shall be a bolt-down, clamping-ring type with weepholes, installed so the lip of the subdrain is flush with sub-floor. 2. Floors under shower compartments shall be lined and made water tight utilizing a shower pan liner, as follows: a. The floor of each individual shower, the shower-area portion of combination shower and drying room, and the entire shower and drying room where the two are not separated by curb or partition, shall be made watertight with a shower pan fabricated in place. b. Liner shall turn up on all sides at least 2 inches (51 mm) above the finished shower curb/threshold level. c. Liner shall be recessed and fastened to an approved backing so as not to occupy the space required for wall covering, and shall not be nailed or perforated at any point less than 1 inch (25 mm) above the finished shower curb/threshold level; also, no nails or screws through shower pan liner at horizontal surfaces (e.g., curb). d. Liner shall be pitched one-fourth unit vertical in 12 units horizontal (2-percent slope) and shall be sloped toward the fixture drains and be securely fastened to the waste outlet at the seepage entrance, making a water-tight joint between the liner and the outlet. e. Coordinate installation of shower pan liner with installation of floor drain specified in Division 22 -Plumbing. Shower pans shall be clamped to drains with the drain clamping ring. 3. Form slope for shower pan with reinforced mortar bed, per TCNA(HB) recommendations. 4. Flood Testing: Shower pan liners and floor drains are components of the plumbing TILING 093013-20 5200 College Road system, and shall be tested and inspected in accordance with ASTM D5957, manufacturer's recommendations, and applicable requirements of governing building code, prior to installation of tile. a. Shower pan liner and floor drain shall not be covered, concealed or put into use until it has been tested, inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA(HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated; if not indicated, request tile pattern. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. D. Workmanship: 1. Lay-out tile work so that no tile less than one-half full size is used. Make all cuts on the outer edge of the field. 2. Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with adjacent tile unless shown otherwise. 3. Form intersections and returns accurately. 4. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed, except as otherwise indicated. 5. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. 6. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface. 7. Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations,finish, or built-in items: a. Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates, escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile. b. Seal tile joints water tight, around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and escutcheons are set in place; for additional information, refer to Section 079005—Joint Sealers. c. Completed work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or defective tile. d. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned. e. Floors: (1) Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except built-in casework units mounted in wall recesses. (2) In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown. (3) Shove and vibrate tiles over 8 inches (200 mm) square to achieve full support of bond coat. f. Walls: (1) Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters, furred areas, and TILING 093013-21 5200 College Road freestanding columns from floor to ceiling, or from floor to nominal wainscot heights shown with tile. (2) Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish materials are shown or specified. (3) At window openings, provide tile stools and reveals, except where other finish materials are shown or specified. (4) Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and cabinets, toilet accessories and mirrors, and equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses,with same tile as scheduled for room proper. E. Tile Joints: 1. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width, unless shown otherwise. 2. Joint Width: a. Grout Joints: (1) Porcelain Mosaic Floor Tile (Types MFT-1 and MFT-2): 1/8 inch (3mm), except as otherwise indicated. (2) Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile (Types GWT-1): 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), except as otherwise indicated. (3) Concrete Floor Tile(Type CFT-1): 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). (4) Precast Cement Terrazzo Floor Tile (Type TFT-1): 3/16 inch (5 mm) (5) Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile (Type PCFT-1): 3/16 inch (5 mm) b. Movement Joints(Sealant): 1/4 inch (6 mm), except as otherwise indicated. 3. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight,without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 4. Grouting a. Preparation: (1) Cure set tile 72 hours before grouting when temperature is low or humidity is high; 48 hours before grouting when hot,dry conditions exist. (2) Check mortar bond strength of installed tile before grouting. (3) Clean sanding water, dust, and foreign substances from joints to be grouted. (4) Clean and dry tile surfaces. b. Grout joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI A108.10. c. Remove grout from tile surfaces while still plastic, as grouting progresses. d. After grouting, promptly remove all grout residue. 5. Keep movement joints free of mortar,grout and other materials prior to application of joint sealant and backer materials. 3.04 INSTALLATION -TILE A. Interior Dry Areas: Install in accordance with designated TCNA(HB) installation method, as follows: 1. Floor: TILING 093013-22 5200 College Road a. General: (1) Service Rating(ASTM C627): Heavy, or Extra Heavy. (2) Environmental Classification: Com2, min. b. Concrete Slab-On-Grade: N/A. c. Elevated Concrete Slab without Recess for Mortar Bed: Installation Method F 113A. (a) Membrane 1: Crack Suppression Membrane (b) Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. (c) Tile: Type PCFT-1, as indicated on drawings. (d) Grout: Grout Type 1 or 3,with Grout Sealer. 2. Wall and Wall Base: Wood; refer to Section 062000-Finish Carpentry. 3. Finish: All finished surfaces to be cleaned with Porcelain Ceramic Tile Cleanerand sealed with Tile Sealer. B. Interior Wet Areas (except Shower): Install in accordance with designated TCNA(HB) installation method, as follows: 1. Floor, Interior: a. General: (1) Service Rating: Heavy or Extra Heavy. (2) Environmental Classification: Com3. b. Concrete Slab-On-Grade: N/A. c. Elevated Concrete Slab: (1) Slab with Recess for Mortar Bed: Installation Method F121. (a) Membrane 1: Cleavage Membrane; unbonded, below the mortar bed. (b) Mortar Bed: Mortar Type 1. (c) Reinforcing:Wire Reinforcing Mesh. (d) Membrane 2: Waterproof Membrane/Crack Suppression Membrane; bonded to top of mortar bed. (e) Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. (f) Tile: Type MFT-1, as indicated on drawings. (g) Grout: Grout Type 1 or 3 with Grout Sealer. (2) Slab without Recess for Mortar Bed: N/A 2. Wall and Base: b. Concrete/CMU Wall: Installation Method W2021. (1) Concrete/CMU Wall. (2) Mortar Bond Coat: MortarType 2. (3) Tile: Porcelain Mosaic Tile. (4) Grout: Grout Type 1,with Grout Sealer. b. Stud Framed Wall: Install in accordance with Installation Method W244C. (1) Metal Studs: Minimum 20 gage metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center; refer to Section 092216-Gypsum Board Assemblies for additional information. TILING 093013-23 5200 College Road (2) Membrane 1: Vapor Retarder Membrane, installed between Cement Backer Board and stud framing. (3) Cement Backer Board. (4) Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. (5) Tile: Type GWT-1, as indicated on drawings. (a) Cove Base Tile at base. (6) Grout: Grout Type 1 or 3 with Grout Sealer. C. Interior Wet Areas, Shower: Install in accordance with designated TCNA(HB) installation method, as follows: 1. General: a. Service Rating: Heavy or Extra Heavy. b. Environmental Classification: Com4. 2. Receptor Floor: Install in accordance with Installation Method B415. a. Interior Patching and Leveling Compound: Slope to drain. b. Shower Pan Liner: Slope to drain. c. Mortar Bed: Mortar Type 1,with Wire Reinforcing Mesh; slope to drain. d. Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. e. Tile: Type MFT-2, as indicated on drawings; slope to drain. f. Grout: Grout Type 1 with Grout Sealer. 3. Receptor Curb: Install in accordance with Installation Method B417, or current equivalent. a. Membrane 1: Vapor Retarder Membrane, installed between Cement Backer Board and curb framing. b. Cement Backer Board. c. Shower Pan Liner, to turn up and over top of curb, per manufacturer's installation instructions; slope liner at top of curb 1:48 toward shower; no fasteners through liner at top or within receptor. (1) Coordinate with Waterproof Membrane at shower walls. d. Mortar Bed: Mortar Type 1, with Wire Reinforcing; slope top of curb 1:48 toward shower. e. Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2; slope top of curb 1:48 toward shower. f. Tile: Type MFT-1 at sides and top of curb; slope top of curb 1:48 toward shower. (1) Cove Base Tile at base of curb. g. Grout: Grout Type 1 or 3,with Grout Sealer. 4. Wall and Base: b. Concrete/CMU Wall: Installation Method W2021. (1) Concrete/CMU Wall. (2) Membrane 1:Waterproof Membrane/Crack Suppression Membrane; provide complete waterproofing, including base flashing and treatment at other termination points; coordinate with shower pan liner at shower receptor. TILING 093013-24 5200 College Road (3) Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. (4) Tile: Type GWT-1. (4) Grout: Grout Type 1,with Grout Sealer. b. Stud Framed Wall: Install in accordance with Installation Method W244C. (1) Metal Studs: Minimum 20 gage metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center; for additional information, refer to Section 092216-Gypsum Board Assemblies. (2) Membrane 1: Vapor Retarder Membrane, installed between Cement Backer Board and stud framing. (3) Cement Backer Board. (4) Membrane 2:Waterproof Membrane/Crack Suppression Membrane; provide complete waterproofing, including base flashing and treatment at other termination points; coordinate with shower pan liner at shower receptor. (5) Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 2. (6) Tile: Type GWT-1. (a) Cove Base Tile at base. (7) Grout: Grout Type 1 or 3,with Grout Sealer. D. Elevator: Install in accordance with designated TCNA(HB) installation method, as follows: 1. Floor: Install in accordance with tile and mortar manufacturers' instructions. a. Mortar Bond Coat: Mortar Type 3. (1) Provide mortar thickness as necessary to establish overall tile floor system installation equal to depth of elevator cab floor recess (i.e., mortar thickness shall equal elevator cab floor recess depth less tile thickness). b. Tile: Type CFT-1,with custom graphic image/pattern design. c. Grout: Grout Type 2 or 3. 2. Wall: Refer to Section 142010 - Passenger Elevators. 3. Wall Base: Refer to Section 142010-Passenger Elevators. 3.05 INSTALLATION -PORCELAIN TILE ON STAIR TREADS A. Setting: 1. Set accurately as shown on approved shop drawings, using thin setting method as indicated on the drawings. 2. Alignment of tiles to metal stair tread shall be straight and true to all dimensions. a. Alignment may not vary more than 1/8 inch in length, height or width. 3. Mortar:Type 2 (thinset) 4. Grout: Grout Type 3. B. Finish: All finished surfaces to be cleaned with Porcelain Tile Cleaner and sealed with Porcelain Tile Sealer. 3.06 INSTALLATION -MOVEMENTJOINTS TILING 093013-25 5200 College Road A. Provide continuous movement joints in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method EJ171 ateach of the following locations: 1. Where tile work abuts restraining surfaces (e.g., perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings), and where changes occur in backing materials. 2. Where joints occur at changes in plane of tile work, including but not limited to the following: a. Joints at junctions between adjacent walls (e.g., inside corner where wall tile meets wall tile). b. Joints between walls and floors (e.g., where bottom of cove base tile meets floor tile). c. Joints between columns,walls and floors. d. Expansion and control joints. 3. All expansion, control, construction, and cold joints in the construction shall continue through the tile work, including such joints at vertical surfaces. a. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints must not be narrower than the structural joint. B. Installation: 1. Movement joints shall be located overall cold joints and saw-cut control joints. 2. To insure that location of joints in tile work align with existing joints in substrate,joints in tile work should be constructed during installation of mortar beds and/ortile, rather than saw-cutting joints after installation. 3. Keep movement joint cavities open and free of dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and setting materials. 4. Set compressible back-up strip when mortar is placed or utilize removable wood strip to provide space for backup after mortar has cured. 5. Install sealant after tile work and grout are dry. Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations. C. Joint Width: 1. Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Porcelain Mosaic Floor Tile: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile:: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Flexible Concrete Tile: 1/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Precast Concrete Terrazzo Tile: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Clean stair treads, and tile and grout surfaces. B. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective work. C. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed stair treads, and tile walls and floors. TILING 093013-26 5200 College Road D. Protect installed stair treads and tile work in accordance with ANSI specifications and manufacturer's instructions; use Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 1. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface or stair treads for four(4) days after installation. E. Remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from stair treads and tile surfaces not more than 24 hours before final inspection. END OF SECTION TILING 093013-27 5200 College Road SECTION 095100 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Acoustical ceiling panels 2. Exposed grid suspension system 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings 4. Perimeter Trim C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10)working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products that have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation. 2. Submittals that do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to,the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance; Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability 2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-1 5200 College Road 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method 5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels 7. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 8. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 9. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material A. Armstrong Fire Guard Products 10. ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint 11. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems 12. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum 13. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products B. International Building Code C. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality D. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code E. ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures F. International Code Council-Evaluation Services-AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components G. International Code Council-Evaluation Services Report-Seismic Engineer Report 1. ESR 1308-Armstrong Suspension Systems H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials-Seismic Engineer Report 1. 0244-Armstrong Single Span Suspension System I. California Department of Public Health CDPH/EHLB Emission Standard Method Version 1.12010 J. LEED- Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design is a set of rating systems for the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of green buildings K. International Well Building Standard L. Mindful Materials M. Living Building Challenge N. U.S. Department of Agriculture BioPreferred program (USDA BioPreffered). 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Continuous/Wall-to-Wall 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees. C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings. D. Acoustical Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-2 5200 College Road requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC,and AC. a. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work. 1.6 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS Transparency: Manufacturers will be given preference when they provide documentation to support sustainable requirements for the following: Material ingredient transparency, Removal of Red List Ingredients per LBCV3, Life Cycle impact information, Low-Emitting Materials, and Clean Air performance. 1. Health Product Declaration.The end use product has a published, complete Health Product Declaration with disclosure at a minimum of 1000ppm of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration open Standard. 2. Declare Label. The end use product has a published Declare label by the International Living Future Institute with disclosure of 100 ppm with a designation of Red List Free or Compliant (less than 1% proprietary ingredients). 3. Low Emitting products with VOC emissions data. Preference will also be given to manufacturers that can provide emissions data showing their products meet CDHP Standard Method v1.1 (Section 01350). 4. Life cycle analysis. Products that have communicated lifecycle data through Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs)will be preferred. 5. End of Life Programs/Recycling:Where applicable, manufacturers that provide the option for recycling of their products into new products at end-of-life through take-back programs will be preferred. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification. 3. Fire Resistance:As follows tested per ASTM E119 and listed in the appropriate floor or roof design in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory B. Acoustical Panels: As with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present. C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-3 5200 College Road enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Standard Ceilings: Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in place is completed and nominally dry; work above ceilings is complete; and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at values near those intended for final occupancy. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. HumiGuard Plus Ceilings: Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products with HumiGuard Plus performance and hot dipped galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel suspension systems can be installed up to 120°F (49°C) and in spaces before the building is enclosed, where HVAC systems are cycled or not operating. Cannot be used in exterior applications where standing water is present or where moisture will come in direct contact with the ceiling. HumiGuard Max Ceilings: Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris. Ceilings with HumiGuard Max performance can be installed in conditions up to 120°F (49°C) and maximum humidity exposure including outdoor applications, and other standing water applications, so long as they are installed with either SS Prelude Plus,AL Prelude Plus, or Prelude Plus Fire Guard XL suspension systems. Products with Humiguard Max performance can be installed in exterior applications, where standing water is present, or where moisture will come in direct contact with the ceiling. Only Ceramaguard with AL Prelude Plus suspension system can be installed over swimming pools. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects B. Warranty Period: 1. Acoustical panels:Ten (10)years from date of substantial completion 2. Suspension:Ten (10)years from date of substantial completion 3. Ceiling System:Thirty(30)years from date of substantial completion C.The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.12 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-4 5200 College Road component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. C: Perimeter Systems 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Acoustical Panels Type AP 1. Surface Texture: Fine 2. Composition: Mineral Fiber 3. Color: White 4. Size: 24 in x 24 in 5. Edge Profile: Beveled Tegular 9/16 in for interface with INTERLUDE XL HRC Dimensional Tee grid. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient( NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.50 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class(CAC) : ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 35 8. Sabin:N/A 9. Articulation Class (AC): 10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A(UL) 11. Light Reflectance (LR)White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.81 12. Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus 13. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer-0% - 1% Pre-Consumer-29% -43% 14. Material Ingredient Transparency: Health Product Declaration (HPD); Declare Label 15. Life Cycle Assessment:Third Party Certified Environment Product Declaration (EPD) 16. Acceptable Product: DUNE, 1775 No added formaldehyde as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries 2.3.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components: Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with type exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. a. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty b. Color: Blizzard White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. c. Sustainability: Environmetal Product Declaration (EPD), Health Product Declaration (HPD) d. Acceptable Product: INTERLUDE XL HRC Dimensional Tee as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635,Table 1, Direct Hung SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-5 5200 College Road unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: 1. 7874-Shadow Molding E. Accessories: PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings) 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions. B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction. C. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight. D. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. E. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces. F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT LOCATED ABOVE CEILING A. Provide ceiling access identification marks to identify controls, valves, and other equipment located within in ceiling plenum areas. Equipment that requires ceiling access identification marks includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Isolation valves. 2. Flow valves. 3. VAV controls. 4. Damper controls. 5. Remote electrical lighting ballasts. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-6 5200 College Road 6. Control dampers. 7. Fire control dampers. 8. HVAC equipment. 9. Remote transformers. B. Coordinate location and design of ceiling access identification marks with Owner's representative. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired. Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage. C. Before disposing of ceilings, contact the Armstrong Recycling Center at 877-276-7876, select option#1 then#8 to review with a consultant the condition and location of building where the ceilings will be removed.The consultant will verify the condition of the material and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling.The Armstrong consultant with provide assistance to facilitate the recycle of the ceiling. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-7 5200 College Road SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095100-8 5200 College Road SECTION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains,varnishes, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory- finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 079005 -Joint Sealers: Removal and replacement of joint sealers, backing and bond breakers;joint sealer for stucco crack repair. B. Section 092410- Portland Cement Plaster Repairing: Patching and repair of damaged or defective cement plaster work. C. Section 099610- High Performance Coatings for Steel: High-performance coating systems for historic replica fire escapes and AESS solar parking structures. D. Section 099723 -Acrylic Waterproof Coating System: High-build acrylic waterproof coating system over exterior cement plaster (stucco). E. Section 210553- Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. F. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. G. Section 230553- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. H. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 099000-1 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D235 --Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent). 2. ASTM D522 --Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 3. ASTM D562 --Standard Test Method for Consistency of Paints Measuring KrebsUnit(KU) Viscosity Using a Stormer-Type Viscometer. 4. ASTM D1308--Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. 5. ASTM D1475 --Standard Test Method For Density of Liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products. 6. ASTM D3273 --Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 7. ASTM D3359--Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. 8. ASTM D3960--Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound(VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings. 9, ASTM D4214--Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films 10. ASTM D5201 --Standard Practice for Calculating Formulation Physical Constants of Paints and Coatings. 11. ASTM D6904--Standard Practice for Resistance to Wind-Driven Rain for Exterior Coatings Applied on Masonry. C. Florida Building Code(FBQ 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building(Current Edition). D. Master Painters Institute, Master Painters and Decorators Association (MPI): 1. MPI (APL) --Master Painters Institute Approved Products List. 2. MPI (APSM) -- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual. E. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC). 1. SSPC(PM1)--Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual,Vol. 1. 2. SSPC-SP 1 --Solvent Cleaning. 3. SSPC-SP 2--Hand Tool Cleaning. 4. SSPC-SP 3 --Power Tool Cleaning. F. U.S. Code of Federal Regulations(CFR): 1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 099000-2 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 1. For submittal procedures, see General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Section 013000-Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category(e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI#47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. C. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: Submit three sets of paper"draw down" samples, illustrating range of colors available for each top coat product specified. a. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Verification Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. a. Submit on aluminum sheet, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size. D. LEED Submittals: None. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. B. Maintain one copy of relevant portions of MPI (APSM) on project site at all times. C. Mock-Up: 1. For general requirements for mock-up, see Section 014000-Quality Requirements. 2. Provide interior wall panel, 10 feet (3 m) long by 10 feet (3 m)wide, illustrating coating color,texture, and finish. a. If requested by Architect, provide additional mock-ups for color and sheen selection. 3. Provide exterior wood trim assembly, 10 feet (3 m) long, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. a. If requested by Architect, provide additional mock-ups for color and sheen selection. 4. Provide one interior and one exterior door and frame assembly illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. a. If requested by Architect, provide additional mock-ups for color and sheen selection. 5. Locate mock-ups where directed. 6. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 099000-3 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number,brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C)and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each paint type, color and sheen used; store where directed. 1. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. B. For additional provisions, see Section 016000- Product Requirements. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Labor and Material Warranty: Submit manufacturer's ten (10)year labor and material warranty for specified systems. Approval of warranty period and confirmation of system compatibility with substrates and joint sealants is required prior to system application. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer. 1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. C. Paints: 1. Benjamin Moore&Co:www.benjaminmoore.com. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc:www.ppgaf.com. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. D. Primers and Block Fillers: Same manufacturer as top coats. 099000-4 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS-GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoaters, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1. Patching materials used in conjunction with coating system shall be compatible with such coating system. B. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Where MPI paint numbers are specified, provide products listed in MPI (APL)for specified MPI categories, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI (APSM), except as otherwise indicated. a. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. 3. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 4. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 5. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's workf rom a single production run. 6. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. C. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. D. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content:Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. F. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. G. Colors:To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract. 2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the 099000-5 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS-EXTERIOR A. Concrete /Cement Plaster(Stucco)/CMU: High-build acrylic waterproof coating system; refer to Section 099723 -Acrylic Waterproof Coating System. B. Paint WE-OP-3L-Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats, over one coat of latex primer sealer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#311 (Latex, Exterior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): Pass; no growth. c. Flexibility(ASTM D522): Pass; no cracking. d. Alkali Resistance(ASTM D1308): Pass. e. Wind Driven Rain Resistance (ASTM D6904): Pass. f. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Exterior High Build, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. C. Paint WE-TR-VS-Wood,Transparent,Varnish, Stain: N/A. D. Paint ME-OP-3L- Ferrous Metals, Latex,3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#311 (Latex, Exterior, High Performance Architectural, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): Pass; no growth. c. Flexibility(ASTM D522): Pass; no cracking. d. Alkali Resistance(ASTM D1308): Pass. e. Wind Driven Rain Resistance (ASTM D6904): Pass. f. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Exterior High Build, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. C. Paint MgE-OP-3L-Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#311 (Latex, Exterior, Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 6), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Mildew Resistance (ASTM D3273): Pass; no growth. c. Flexibility (ASTM D522): Pass; no cracking. d. Alkali Resistance(ASTM D1308): Pass. e. Wind Driven Rain Resistance (ASTM D6904): Pass. f. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Exterior High Build, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. 099000-6 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS-INTERIOR A. Paint CI-OP-3L-Concrete/Concrete Masonry/Cement Plaster (Stucco), Latex, 3Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#140(Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, MPIGIoss Level 4), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Premium Interior Paint& PrimerPearl Finish, or equal. 4. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. B. Paint WI-OP-3L-Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats, over one coat of latex primer sealer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#140(Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, MPIGIoss Level 4), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Premium Interior Paint& PrimerPearl Finish, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. C. Paint WI-TR-VS-Wood (except Wood Floors),Transparent,Varnish, Stain: N/A. D. Paint WI-TR-VS-Wood Floors,Transparent, Varnish, Stain: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two coats of varnish, over stain and sealer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI# (Varnish, Water-Based, Clear, Satin), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: Water-based polyurethane resin. b. VOC: Less than 250 g/L(2.08 lbs./gal.). c. Shall meet MPI Green Performance Standard (GPS-1). d. Product: , or equal. 4. Stain: MPI # (Stain, Interior,Water-Based, Semi-Transparent), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: b. VOC: Less than 250 g/L(2.08 lbs./gal.). 099000-7 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road c. Shall meet MPI Green Performance Standard (GPS-1). b. Product: , or equal. 5. Sealer: MPI# ( ), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: b. VOC: Less than 250 g/L(2.08 lbs./gal.). c. Shall meet MPI Green Performance Standard (GPS-1). b. Product: , or equal. E. Paint MI-OP-3L- Ferrous Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#140(Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, MPIGIoss Level 4), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Premium Interior Paint& PrimerPearl Finish, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. F. Paint MgI-OP-3L-Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI#140(Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, MPIGIoss Level 4), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: 100-percent acrylic latex. b. Product: Benjamin Moore Regal° Select Premium Interior Paint& PrimerP earl Finish, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coat product. G. Paint I-OP-FL-Opaque Finish on Concrete Floors. 1. Preparation as specified by paint manufacturer. 2. Two top coats and one coat primer; or if self-priming, then two top coats only. 3. Top Coat(s): MPI #60 (Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss), meeting the following criteria: a. Vehicle Type: Epoxy-modified acrylic latex. b. Product: Benjamin Moore Floor& Patio° Latex Floor& Patio Low Sheen Enamel, or equal. 4. Primer(s):As recommended by manufacturer of top coats. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Materials (for repairing cracks and other defects in exterior cement plaster/stucco): 1. Patching Material Type 1 (for static hairline cracks caused by plastic or drying shrinkage):Type suitable for application, as recommended by coating manufacturer. 099000-8 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 2. Patching Material Type 2 (for static cracks hairline to 1/4-inch in width):Water-based, acrylic elastomeric crack filler for repairing cracks. a. Performance Characteristics: (1) Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 100 psi (0.7 MPa). (2) Ultimate Elongation at Break (ASTM D412): 275 percent. b. Product: (1) Smooth: "Sonocoat Acrylic Patching Compound 748" by BASF. (2) Textured: "Sonocoat Acrylic Patching Compound 746T" by BASF. 3. Patching Material Type 3 (for patching dynamic cracks more than 1/4-inch in width):Joint Sealant Type S-5; for additional requirements, refer to Section 079005. 4. Patching Material Type 4 (for repair/replacement of small areas of damaged cement plaster/stucco): Repair Mortar; for additional requirements, refer to Section 092400- Portland Cement Plastering. 5. Patching Material Type 5 (for repair/replacement of large areas of damaged or delaminated cement plaster/stucco): Cement plaster(stucco);for additional requirements, refer to Section 092400-Portland Cement Plastering. 6. Primer/Surface Conditioner: As recommended by Patching Material manufacturer. B. Fastener Head Cover Material: Use Patching Material Type 2.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 1. Patched/repaired cement plaster/stucco substrates must be fully cured in accordance with recommendations of paint/coating manufacturer. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. 1. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces is within acceptable tolerances recommended by the coating manufacturer. E. Check adhesion of old paint using ASTM D3359, measuring adhesion by Tape Method A. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. 2. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the coating manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. 099000-9 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 4. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 5. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. 6. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra- sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 7. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. b. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. c. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. 8. Cement Plaster(Stucco) Surfaces to be Painted: a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. b. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 9. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. b. Apply latex based sealer or primer. 10. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt,grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 11. Concrete Floors to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. 12. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. 13. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-SP 2or SSPC-SP 3, followed by SSPC-SP 1. 14. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. b. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. c. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. 4. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. 15. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: a. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. a. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. b. Clean surfaces with solvent. c. Prime bare steel surfaces. d. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. B. Additional Requirements for Surfaces with Existing Coatings: 1. Before application of new coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly-adhered coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife: a. Sand existing glossy surfaces to be painted to reduce gloss. 099000-10 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road (1) Brush, and wipe clean with a damp cloth to remove dust. b. Previously painted surfaces specified to be repainted or damaged during construction shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. c. Blistering, cracking, flaking and peeling or other deteriorated coatings shall be removed. d. Chalk shall be removed so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214,the chalk resistance rating is no less than 8. e. Slick surfaces shall be roughened. Damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips, and spalls shall be repaired with suitable material to match adjacent undamaged areas. f. Edges of chipped paint shall be feather edged and sanded smooth. g. Rusty metal surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC requirements. (1) Solvent, mechanical,or chemical cleaning methods shall be used to provide surfaces suitable for painting. h. New, proposed coatings shall be compatible with existing coatings. 2. Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects: a. Sand, spackle, and treat surfaces with minor defects (i.e., scratches, nicks, cracks, gouges, spalls, alligatoring, chalking, or irregularities due to partial peeling of previous coating) as necessary to render such surfaces to a uniform smooth finish. b. Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D4214, the chalk rating is not less than 8. 3. Removal of Existing Coatings: Remove existing coatings from the following: a. Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects. b. Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area. c. Surfaces where rust is visible/apparent through existing coating. 4. Cement Plaster(Stucco) Substrate Repairs: a. Repair cracks, holes, spalled/delaminated areas, and other defects in existing cement plaster/stucco surfaces using appropriate repair materials; verify compatibility of repair materials with coating system prior to use. b. Remove any protruding concrete accessories and patch to smooth out any irregularities. c. For additional requirements, refer to Section 092410-Portland Cement Plaster Repairing. 5. Other Substrate Repairs: a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal. b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating removal. c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified. C. Additional Requirements for New(Previously Uncoated)Surfaces: 1. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 2. Surfaces: a. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. b. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. 099000-11 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road c. Mask surfaces that are not to be finished, or that are to be finished at a later time. 3. Marks: Seal with shellac that which may bleed through surface finishes. 4. Impervious Surfaces: a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 5. New Cement Plaster(Stucco) Surfaces to be Painted: a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with same patching materials used for similar repairs to existing plaster; for additional requirements, refer to Section 092400-Portland Cement Plastering. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. c. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 6. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: a. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. b. Apply coat of etching primer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. 4. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. 5. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. 6. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. 7. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 8. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 9. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. B. Additional Requirements for Cement Plaster(Stucco): 1. For uniformity of color, texture and sheen, use consistent application techniques throughout the Project. 2. Apply coating material in two (2) coats; total dry film thickness (DFT) per manufacturer's requirements for 10-year warranty, but not less than 12 mils. 3. Multiple coats may be required when color difference between existing and new coatings is significant. 4. Maintain proper wet film thickness (WFT) during application,to ensure performance characteristics desired. 5. Work to natural break in surfaces before stopping work. 6. Work from wet edge with 50 percent overlap. 099000-12 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road 7. Use sufficient material to obtain pinhole-free, consistent film build on treated surfaces. 8. Priming: a. Apply primer to all previously unpainted plaster/stucco, and to previously painted plaster/stucco that are chalking or friable (powdery) after power washing. b. Fill porous surfaces with primer, and back-roll to eliminate pinholes. Apply by working material into pores, crevices and joints. Allow primer to dry before proceeding (typically 24 to 48 hours). c. Apply finish coats after primer has dried, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 9. Application: a. By Brush: (1) Application by brush is recommended only for small inaccessible areas such as touch-ups. (2) Use only nylon brushes. b. By Roller: (1) Use a 3/4 inch to 1-1/4 inch (12/5 mm to 32 mm) nap roller cover (lamb'swool) (2) Completely saturate roller and keep it loaded with coating to building required thickness (3) Roll coating in consistent fan-like pattern, to achieve uniform coating thickness. (4) Cross-roll to achieve uniform thickness and maintain wet edge. Back-roll material in one direction, as stroke variations may result in uneven color and texture. c. By Spray: (1) Smooth Texture: Use airless equipment. (2) Fine or Coarse Texture: Use heavy-duty sprayer designed for application of coatings that contain sand particles,with gun pressure of approximately30 psi (0.21 MPa). (3) Back-rolling after spray application is strongly recommended, to achieve uniform coating thickness and texture. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 099000-13 PAINTING AND COATING 5200 College Road SECTION 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers and janitor closets. B. Grab bars. C. Concealed anchor plates, fasteners. D. ADA piping protection systems. E. Framed mirrors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed metal backing plates for attachment and support of toilet accessories and grab bars to stud-framed or furred walls/partitions. B. Section 093000-Tiling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For requirements relating to reference standards,see Section 014219 - Reference Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A123/A123M --Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A269 -- Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 3. ASTM A653/A653M -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM A666 -- Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 5. ASTM B456 -- Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. 6. ASTM F446 -- Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area. 7. ASTM G21 -- Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 102813-1 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road 8. ASTM G22 --Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria. C. Florida Building Code, 2010 edition (FBC): 1. FBC-B-- Florida Building Code, Building (Current Edition). 2. FBC-A-- Florida Building Code, Accessibility(Current edition). D. Glass Association of North America (GANA). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 007200 -General Conditions (AIA A201 - 2007SP, including but not limited to Section 3.12) and Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. General: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. 2. Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 3. ADA Piping Protection Systems: Provide data describing product specifications, materials, colors, accessories, extensions, and code compliances. C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings for toilet accessories and grab bars attached to walls, partitions, or toilet compartment panels. 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. 4 Coordinate with applicable substrate and framing conditions. Include load calculations confirming adequacy of wall/partition framing, internal wall reinforcement, concealed supports, and backing plate details, based on specified design loads. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessibility Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable regulatory requirements for accessibility, including FBC-A. 2. Operating Force: Soap dispensers shall operate with a maximum five-pound operating force. 3. Wall Mounted Grab Bars, Shower Seats, and related fasteners and mounting devices: a. Grab Bars and Shower Seats shall comply with the 2020 Florida Accessibility Code For Building Construction, Section 608.3. b. Grab bars shall comply with the length and positioning requirements shown in 102813-1 2 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road 2020 Florida Accessibility Code For Building Construction figures 604.5.1, and 604.5.2. (1) Grab bars shall have a gripping surface at the locations shown and do not obstruct the required clear floor area. c. The diameter or width of the gripping surfaces of grab bars shall be 1-1/4 in. tot-1/2 in. (32 mm to 38 mm). Where grab bars are mounted adjacent to a wall, the space between the wall and the grab bar shall be 1-1/2 in. (38 mm). d. The structural strength of Grab Bars and Shower Seats, and related fasteners and mounting devices shall meet the specifications of FBC-B SECTION 11- 4.26.3, and as follows: (1) Bending stress induced by the maximum bending moment from the application of 250 Ibf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the assembly. (2) Shear stress induced by the application of 250 Ibf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable shear stress for the assembly. If the connection between the assembly and its mounting bracket or other support is considered to be fully restrained, then direct and torsional shear stresses shall be totaled for the combined shear stress, which shall not exceed the allowable shear stress for the material. (3) Bending stress induced by the maximum bending moment from the application of 250 Ibf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the assembly. (4) Shear force induced in a fastener or mounting device from the application of 250 Ibf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable lateral load of either the fastener or mounting device or the supporting structure, whichever is the smaller allowable load. (5) Tensile force induced in a fastener by a direct tension force of 250 Ibf(1112N) plus the maximum moment from the application of 250 Ibf(1112N) shall be less than the allowable withdrawal load between the fastener and the supporting structure. (6) Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings. 4. Toilet Paper Dispensers: a. All toilet paper dispensers shall meet the requirement to be free spinning. Dispensers that control delivery, or that do not permit continuous paper flow, shall not be used. b. All dual roll toilet paper dispensers shall be fully automatic and shall not require the end user to perform any function to obtain the second roll. 5. Mirrors: Mirrors shall be mounted with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface no higher than 40 inches (1015 mm) above the finish floor. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1. Provide concealed mounting plates, backplates, anchor plates, or other approved reinforcement for support of accessories to be anchored to stud wall, furred wall, or 102813-1 3 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road other hollow wall assembly. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Room Accessories and Grab Bars: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment: Products specified in this Section to be manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; model numbers have been cited to establish type of accessory and acceptable level of quality, performance, function and appearance. 2. Other Manufacturers: a. Equivalent products by other manufacturers listed herein may be submitted for consideration, provided that such products are equal in quality, performance, function and appearance; however, manufacturer's literature and samples for each unit proposed as equal shall be submitted for review and approval by Consultant. b. Other Manufacturers: (1) A &J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. (2) American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. (3) Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. B. ADA Protection Systems: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: TrueBro, Inc.; 7 Main Street, Ellington, CT 06029; Tel. 860- 875-2868 or 800-340-5969; Fax. 860-872-0300; internet:www.truebro.com. C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide three keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666,Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269,Type 304 or 316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653, withG90/Z275 coating. F. Adhesive: Two-component epoxy type, waterproof. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized,tamper-proof, security type. H. Manufacturer's identification logo must be permanently stamped into each accessory to 102813-1 4 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road provide positive identification to end user for replacement or matching equipment in the future. Such stamping shall be no larger than 1 x 1 inch, and shall be unobtrusively located on accessory. Lavatory mounted soap dispensers shall have the manufacturer's name permanently molded into the container. Adhesive slickers shall not be acceptable. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No.4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Baked Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1. Type: Surface wall-mounted Twin-Jumbo-roll toilet tissue dispenser. 2. Material: 20-gauge, stainless steel sheet,Type 304. 3. Capacity: Two toilet tissue rolls up to 10 inch (255mm) diameter with a 3-inch(75mm) diameter core (horizontally). 4. Product: Bobrick B-2892, or equal. 5. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Toilet Tissue Dispenser to wall with #10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. b. Attachment to Toilet Compartment Panel: Secure in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation method. B. Soap Dispenser-Type 1: 1. Type: Surface wall-mounted soap dispenser. 2. Material: 22-gauge stainless steel sheet with satin finish. 3. Capacity: 40 fl oz (1.2 Q. 4. Product: Bobrick 2112, or equal. 5. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Soap Dispenser to wall with #10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; 102813-1 5 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. C. Soap Dispenser-Type 2: 1. Type: Lavatory-mounted soap dispenser. 2. Material: a. Piston, Spout and Top Cover: Type 304 stainless steel, with bright polished finish. b. Cover Spacer: Rigid, impact-resistant polyester. c. Escutcheon: Chrome plated, high-impact resistant ABS with bright polished finish; concealed locking mechanism. d. Body and Shank: High impact resistant plastic. e. Valve: ABS cylinder; stainless steel spring. f. Container: Translucent, shatter-resistant polyethylene. 3. Capacity: 34 fl oz (1.0 Q. 4. Product: Bobrick B-8226, or equal. 5. Installation Method: Mount Soap Dispenser in unused faucet hole on lavatory, in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation method. D. Stainless Steel Channel Framed Mirror-Type 1: 1. Type: Snap locking design. 2. Materials: a. Frame: Mirror shall have one-piece, polished stainless steel 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch (13 x 13 x 13 mm) channel frame. Mirror frame shall have 90- degree uniform corners; open or uneven mitered corners are not acceptable. b. Mirror: No. 1 quality, 1/4 inch (6-mm) float/plate glass. All mirror edges shall be protected by filler strips. Mirror back shall be protected by full-size shock absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive 1/8 inch (3-mm) thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel back with formed edges for additional strength shall have integral hanging brackets for mounting on concealed one-piece rectangular wall hanger(s). 3. Size (Width x Height): 18 x 30 inches. 4. Product: Bobrick B-165 1830. 5. Installation Method: Mount wall hanger on wall, then hang mirror on wall hanger; locking device to automatically secure mirror to wall hanger when it is lowered intofinal position. a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Mirror to wall with#10 x 2 inch(M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. E. Stainless Steel Channel Framed Mirror-Type 2: 1. Type: Screw locking design. 2. Materials: a. Frame: Mirror shall have one-piece, polished stainless steel 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch (13 x 13 x 13 mm) channel frame. Mirror frame shall have 90- degree uniform corners; open or uneven mitered corners are not acceptable. 102813-1 6 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road b. Mirror: No. 1 quality, 1/4 inch (6-mm) float/plate glass. All mirror edges shall be protected by filler strips. Mirror back shall be protected by full-size shock absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive 1/8 inch (3-mm) thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel back with formed edges for additional strength shall have integral hanging brackets for mounting on concealed one-piece rectangular wall hanger(s). 3. Size (Width x Height): 18 x 30 inches. 4. Product: Bobrick B-165 1830. 5. Installation Method: Mount wall hanger on wall, then hang mirror on wall hanger; lower mirror into final position and lock it to wall hanger by tightening Phillips- head locking screws that are concealed in the bottom of the frame. a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Mirror to wall with#10 x 2 inch(M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head,stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. F. Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser-Type 1 1. Type: All welded construction 2. Materials:18-8 S, type-304, 22-gauge (0.8mm) stainless steel. 3. Size: 10-3/4in x 4in 4. Product: Bobrick B-262 5. Operation: Unit dispenses C-fold and multifold paper towels 3-1/8" to 3-13/16" (79-97mm) deep. Slots in sides of cabinet indicate refill time. Capacity: 400 C-fold or525 multifold paper towels. G. Sanitary Napkin Disposal -Type 1: 1. Type: Surface-mounted sanitary napkin disposal. 2. Material: 22-gauge stainless steel sheet; exposed surfaces to have satin finish. a. Service Access Door: Secured to cabinet with full-length stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with a tumbler lock. b. Disposal Door: Unit shall have a self-closing panel covering disposal opening. Panel shall be secured to door with spring-loaded, full-length stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with international graphic symbol identifying usage. c. Receptacle: Napkin disposal shall be furnished with a removable, leak-proof, molded polyethylene receptacle. (1) Capacity: 1.2 gal. (4.6 liters). 3. Product: Bobrick B-254. 4. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 -Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Napkin Disposal to wall with #10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. b. Attachment to Toilet Compartment Panel: Secure in accordance with 102813-1 7 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road manufacturer's recommended installation method. H. Sanitary Napkin Disposal -Type 2: 1. Type: Partition-mounted sanitary napkin disposal, designed to serve two toilet compartments. 2. Material: 22-gauge stainless steel sheet; exposed surfaces to have satin finish. a. Service Access Door: Secured to cabinet with full-length stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with a tumbler lock. b. Disposal Panels (2): Unit shall have two self-closing panels covering disposal opening. Panel shall be secured to door with spring-loaded, full-length stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with international graphic symbol identifying usage. c. Receptacle: Napkin disposal shall be furnished with a removable, leak-proof, molded polyethylene receptacle. (1) Capacity: 1.2 gal. (4.6 liters). 3. Product: Bobrick B-354. 4. Installation Method: Mount in toilet partition, centered through 11 inch W x 15-1/2inch H (280 x 395mm) cutout, using through-bolting method of attachment. I. Single Robe Hook: 1. Material:Type-305 stainless steel; polished finish. a. Flange shall be 22 gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket that is secured to concealed, 16-gauge (1.6mm)wall plate with a stainless steel setscrew. b. Cap shall be 10 gauge(3.6mm),welded to support arm. 2. Product: Bobrick B-671. 3. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 -Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Robe Hook to wall with#10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head,stainless steel,sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate b. Attachment to Toilet Compartment Panel: Secure in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation method. 2.05 SHOWER ACCESSORIES A. Folding Shower Seat: 1. Type: Folding shower seat with padded cushion. 2. Materials: a. Seat: 2-inch (51mm) thick overall with 1-1/2 inch (38mm) thick, closed-cell polyurethane foam padding mounted on 1/2-inch (13mm) thick plywood; covered in white water-resistant reinforced vinyl fabric(e.g., Naugahyde). b. Frame: Stainless steel sheet with satin finish; 16-gauge (1.6mm), 1-1/4 inch (32mm) square members; 18-gauge(1.2mm), 1-inch (25mm) diameter tubing. c. Mounting Flanges (2): 3/16-inch (5mm) thick stainless steel with satin finish; 3-inch (76mm) diameter with three mounting screw holes. d. Baseplate: Heavy-gauge stainless steel sheet. 102813-1 8 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road e. Spring: 17-7, type-301, 24-gauge (0.6mm) stainless steel sheet; spot-welded to baseplate. f. Guide Bracket: 16-gauge(1.6mm) stainless steel sheet with satin finish. 3. Product: Bobrick B-517 (right)/B-518(left). 4. Installation Method: Secure unit to wall at points designated by manufacturer, with two mounting flanges at top and the baseplate and guide bracket below. a. Furred CMU/Concrete Wall: Provide solid blocking between furring, and centered on mounting flanges and baseplate, and secure seat mounting flanges and baseplate to wall with stainless steel sleeve type expansion anchors w/ minimum 2 inches embedment into CMU/concrete. b. Stud-Framed Wall/Partition: Ensure that studs supporting seat are spaced no more than 12 inches on center. Provide concealed backing secured to studs, and secure seat mounting flanges and baseplate to wall with stainless steel toggle bolts. B. Shower Curtain Rod: 1. Material: Extra Heavy Duty, Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inchwall thickness min., satin-finished, with 2.50 inch square, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin- finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners. 2. Product: Bobrick B-6047. 3. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure Curtain Rod flanges to wall with #10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval- head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wall finish and concealed backing plate. C. Shower Curtain: 1. Material:Vinyl .008 inch (0.2mm)thick. 2. Size: 42 inch W x 72 inch H (1070 x 1830 mm), hemmed edges. 3. Grommets: Nickel-plated brass grommets along top hem on 6 inch (150 mm) centers. 4. Color: Opaque Matte white 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Stainless steel spring wire designed for snap closure. D. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: 1. Material: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, 22 gauge, surface-mounted with drain holes, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrate and backplate. 2. Product: Bobrick B-6807. 3. Installation Method: a. Attachment to Stud-Framed or Furred Partition: Provide concealed metal backing plate per Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, then secure#10 x 2 inch (M4.8 x 50mm) Phillips oval-head, stainless steel, sheet-metal screws, at points designated by manufacturer; screws shall extend through wallfinish and concealed backing plate. 2.06 GRAB BARS 102813-1 9 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road A. General: 1. Grab Bars: a. Material/Fabrication: Type 304, 18-8 S alloy, 18-gage, stainless steel with satin finish; 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) outside diameter; minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness; non-slip grasping surface finish; concealed flange mounting. (1) Ends to be heliarc welded to exposed mounting flanges. b. Fabricate and install to: (1) Provide 1.50 inches (38 mm) clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. (2) Comply with ASTM F446, and to withstand a 900-pound (4 000 N)force. 2. Anchor/Backing Plates: a. Each grab bar attached to stud-framed or furred wall/partition shall be provided with concealed anchor plate(s) and fastening system, as recommended bymanufacturer for each applicable condition and as required to meet design load requirements. b. Each grab bar attached to toilet compartment panel shall be provided with backing plates and fastening system, as recommended by manufacturer for each applicable condition and as required to meet design load requirements. B. Grab Bars: 1. Straight Grab Bar, 36 Inches: a. Product: Bobrick B-6806 x 36, or equal. b. Concealed Anchor Plate(s): Bobrick 2562-36. c. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "E". 2. Straight Grab Bar,42 Inches: a. Product: Bobrick B-6806 x 42, or equal. b. Concealed Anchor Plate(s): Bobrick 2562-0; two per grab bar. c. Backing Plate(s): Bobrick 2583; two per grab bar. d. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "F". 3. Horizontal Two-Wall Grab Bar, 36 x 36 Inches: a. Product: Bobrick B-6861, or equal. b. Concealed Anchor Plate(s): Bobrick 2562-0;three per grab bar. c. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "G". C. Anchor/Backing Plates: 1. Concealed Anchor Plate (for attachment of grab bar to stud-framed or furred wall/partition): 3 inches (75 mm) x 12-gage galvanized steel plate with 1/4-20 (6 mm) threaded holes extruded and tapped to give minimum 0.200 inch (5 mm) of usable thread per hole; length of anchor plate to be per manufacturer's standard for grab bar length. a. Screws: 1/4-20 round-head stainless steel machine screws; minimum three per flange. b. Product: Bobrick 2562-series, or equal. D. Installation Method: 1. Concealed Anchor Plate: Install concealed anchor plate in accordance with 102813-1 10 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road manufacturer's installation instructions (e.g., BobrickTB-49). 2. Backing Plate: Install backing plate in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions; coordinate with toilet compartment panel installation and support. 3. Grab Bar: Install grab bar in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions; coordinate with requirements for anchor/backing plate(s) installation. 2.07 ADA PIPING PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Under sink Piping Protective Covers: 1. General: Comply with requirements of FBC-A, and as follows: a. Lavatory P-traps and angle valve assemblies shall be covered with under sink protective pipe cover assemblies. (1) Cover assemblies shall include P-trap cover, two angle valve covers, offset grid drain cover, tailpiece cover, and extensions as necessary to cover all under sink piping and valves. b. Covers shall be secured with snap-clip flush reusable fasteners, and angle stop shall have locking access cover. Cable ties or baggie tie fasteners are not acceptable. c. Covers shall be installable and removable without requiring disassembly of P- trap or angle stop. d. Covers shall allow for emergency and maintenance access to the plumbing P- trap clean-out and angle stop valve without removing piping covers. 2. Specifications: a. Material: Molded closed cell vinyl. b. Nominal Wall Thickness: 1/8 inch. c. Durometer: 60-70 Shore A. d. Finish: Smooth, high gloss. e. UV Protection: Will not fade or discolor. f. Durability: Virtually indestructible. g. Fasteners: Reusable snap clips. h. Color: White. i. Compatibility: Shall fit all 1.25 to 1.50 inch cast brass or tubular P-trap assemblies and 3/8 to 1/2 inch angle stop assemblies. Coordinate with specified plumbing fixtures. j. Flame Characteristics (ASTM D635): ATB, 0 sec.; AEB, 0 mm. k. Thermal Conductivity: K value of 1.17 plus dead air space. I. Bacteria/Fungus Resistance (ASTM G21 and G22): Anti-microbial vinyl formula; Result 0. 3. Product: TrueBro Lav-Guard Undersink Protective Pipe Covers,or equal. 2.08 UTILITY ROOM/JANITOR CLOSET ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop, Broom Holder and Hooks: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304 stainless steel, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. Mount securely to back wall, and extend the shelf around the other two sides of the closet with heavy-duty supports. 1. Drying rod: Stainless steel, 1/4-inch diameter. 2. Hooks: Two 0.06-inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 102813-1 11 TOILET ACCESSORIES 5200 College Road 3. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 4. Length: 30 inches; manufacturer's standard length for number of holders/hooks. 5. Product: Bobrick B-239x34, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Coordinate placement and installation of blocking, reinforcement plates, and concealed anchors required for installation of accessories, with construction of related work specified in other sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories, grab bars, and ADA piping protection systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and as indicated on drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: 1. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Except as otherwise indicated, top of dispenser to be mounted at 31.0 inches above finish floor. a. Mount toilet tissue dispenser so that top of dispenser is at 3.0 inches below top of grab bar; clearance between bottom of grab bar and tissue dispenser to be not less than 1.5 inches. D. Mirrors: 1. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations and manufacturers' instructions. 2. Set mirrors plumb and level,free of optical distortion. 3. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. After installation, remove all traces of protective coating paper, and clean accessories in manner not to damage finish. B. Adjust accessories for proper operation. Test mechanisms, hinges, locks, and latches and where necessary adjust and lubricate. END OF SECTION 102813-1 12 TOILET ACCESSORIES Client#: 705984 DL27 ACORDTM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDDIWYY) 05/24/2023 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT:If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement.A statement on this certificate does not confer any rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Marsh &McLennan Agency HO(AIC,NIJ,Ext:727 447-6481 FAX No Bouchard Region E-MAIL certificates@bouchardinsurance.com 1 N. Dale Mabry Hwy, Suite#450 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Tampa, FL 33609 INSURER A:Colony Insurance Company 39993 INSURED INSURER B:Ategrity Specialty Insurance Company 16427 D L Porter Constructors, Inc. Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company 23396 INSURER C: p Y 6574 Palmer Park Circle INSURER D: Y Infinit Auto Insurance Co 11738 Sarasota, FL 34238-2777 INSURER E INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR INSR WVD POLICY NUMBER MMIDDIYYYY MMIDDIYYYY A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y 600GLO19200002 01/01/2023 01/01/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $1 000000 CLAIMS-MADE � OCCUR PREMISESOERENTED rnce $100 000 X BI/PD Ded:5,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $5 000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY� PRO- POLICY F7 LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ BINED D AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y 509820082251001 01/01/2023 01/01/202 COMEaa SINGLE LIMIT $1>000>000 ccident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE X AUTOS ONLY X AUTOS ONLY Per accident $ B X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR Y Y 01PXLP700023690 01/01/2023 01/01/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $5000000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE s5,000,000 DED RETENTION$N/A $ C WORKERS COMPENSATION Y WC208074511 01/01/2023 01/01/202 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ER Y I N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? � N I A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C Leased/Rented IM205936415 01/01/2023 01/01/2024 $600,000 Equipment DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) PROJECT: Bayshore Manor Buildout for Supervisor of Elections COMPLETTE CERTIFICATE HOLDER(S)&ADDITIONAL INSURED(S): Monroe County Board of County Commissioners and any other entity as required by written contract or agreement and subject to the terms,conditions and exclusions as specified in the policies. 1ISK (See Attached Descriptions) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 24 2 3 a, SHOULD ANY OF THI ... Monroe County Board of County Commissioners THE EXPIRATION 1100 Simonton Street ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Room 2-216 Key West, FL 33040-3110 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION.All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) 1 of 2 The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD #S12819772/M12221761 RCJTF DESCRIPTIONS (Continued from Page 1) It is agreed by endorsement to the General Liability policy that this policy shall not be canceled by the Insurance Carrier without first giving thirty(30)days prior written notice to Monroe County Board of County Commissioners except for nonpayment of premium or if the first named insured elects to non-renew. It is agreed by endorsement to the Workers Compensation policy that this policy shall not be canceled by the Insurance Carrier without first giving sixty(60)days prior written notice to Monroe County Board of County Commissioners except for nonpayment of premium or if the first named insured elects to non-renew. Additional insured status with respect to General Liability,Automobile Liability and Umbrella Liability per the attached form(s). Waiver of subrogation applies with respect to General Liability,Workers Compensation and Umbrella Liability per the attached form(s). Coverage is primary as respects to General Liability and Umbrella Liability; and non contributory as subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions of your policy. Umbrella follows form. Proprietors/Partners/Executive Officers/Members Excluded: Gary Loer, President SAGITTA 25.3(2016/03) 2 of 2 #S12819772/M12221761 POLICY NUMBER: D L Porter Constructors, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY NAMED INSURED:6000LO19200002 CG 20 10 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Organ ization s : Locations Of Covered Operations Where required by Written Contract Where required by Written Contract Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II — Who Is An Insured is amended to B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these include as an additional insured the person(s) or additional insureds, the following additional exclu- organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only sions apply: with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or damage" or "personal and advertising injury" "property damage"occurring after: caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. All work, including materials, parts or equip- 1. Your acts or omissions; or ment furnished in connection with such work, 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your on the project(other than service, maintenance behalf; or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location of the the additional insured(s) at the location(s) desig- covered operations has been completed; or nated above. 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its in- tended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor en- gaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 10 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 ❑ NAMED INSURED:D L Porter Constructors, Inc. POLICY NUMBER:600GLOI9200002 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG2037070.4 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided Linder the following: CONINIERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY"COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Or Or anizafion s : Location And Description Of Completed Operations Where required by written contract Where required by written contract Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above,will be shown in the Declarations. Section II _ Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s)or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or"property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products- completed operations hazard", CG 20 37 07 04 0 ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 ❑ NAMED INSURED:D L Porter Constructors, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER:600GL019200002 CG 20 01 12 19 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NONCONTRIBUTORY - OTHER INSURANCE CONDITION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART The following is added to the Other Insurance (2) You have agreed in writing in a contract or Condition and supersedes any provision to the agreement that this insurance would be contrary: primary and would not seek contribution Primary And Noncontributory Insurance from any other insurance available to the additional insured. This insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from any other insurance available to an additional insured under your policy provided that: (1) The additional insured is a Named Insured under such other insurance; and CG 20 01 12 19 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2018 Page 1 of 1 NAMED INSURED: D L Porter Constructors, Inc. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY NUMBER:600GL019200002 CG 24 04 05 09 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: As Required By Written Contract Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV—Conditions: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products- completed operations hazard". This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 ❑ Infinity Commercial Auto 11700 Great Oaks Way, Suite 450 Alpharetta, GA 30022 Underwritten by: Infinity Assurance Insurance Company Customer Service: (800)722-3391 Claims Service: (800)334-1661 ADDITIONAL INSURED/INTEREST ENDORSEMENT 509-82008-2251-001 01/01/2024 12:01 a.m. D L Porter Constructors, INC J 6574 Palmer Park Cir D L Porter Constructors, INC Sarasota, FL 34238-2777 This endorsement is attached to and forms a part of the policy. This endorsement incepts at 12:01 a.m. on the Amend Date listed at the bottom of this form. No changes will be effective prior to the time changes are requested. Monroe County Board Of County Commission 1000 CSL/1000 CSL 1. Insurance under the liability coverages apply to each interest listed above except when the vehicle is operated by the additional interest party, their agent, or employee. 2. The additional interest(s) shall not increase our limits of liability. 3. We will pay for damages only if such damages arise out of acts or omissions of: a. You or an insured; or b. Any other person except as listed in 1. above. All other terms, limits and conditions of this policy remain unchanged. INSURED COPY AMEND DATE: 03/27/2023 50982AIE01 ENDORSEMENT: 1-7 WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WC 00 03 13 NAMED INSURED: D L Porter Constructors, Inc. (Ed. 4-84) POLICY NUMBER:WC208074511 WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule "Any person or organization required by written contract or certificate of insurance." "This endorsement is not applicable in California, Kentucky, New Hampshire, New Jersey, Texas and Utah." The endorsement does not apply to policies or exposure in Missouri where the employer is in the construction group of classifications. According to Section 287.150(6) of the Missouri statutes, a contractual provision purporting to waive subrogation rights is against public policy and void where one party to the contract is an employer in the construction group of code classifications. For policies or exposure in Missouri, the following must be included in the Schedule: Any person or organization for which the employer has agreed by written contract, executed prior to loss, may execute a waiver of subrogation. However, for purposes of work performed by the employer in Missouri, this waiver of subrogation does not apply to any construction group of classifications as designated by the waiver of right to recover from others (subrogation) rule in our manual. This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. (The information below is required only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) Endorsement Effective Policy No. Endorsement No. Insured Premium$ Insurance Company Countersigned by WC 00 03 13 Hart Forms&Services (Ed. 4-84) Copyright 1983 National Council on Compensation Insurance. Reorder No.14-4888